Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. the hierarchy of elements. In this case. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. and plans. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. hence. If you move the partition. and open Metric\Templates. If the length of the elevation is changed. and schedules required for a building project. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project.rte. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. and phases when you need it. every drawing sheet. For most tutorial projects. the operation of the software is parametric. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. 12 Select DefaultMetric. you will use the default template. drawing sheets. 13 Click OK. how to navigate the user interface. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. In the Revit Architecture model. review the Revit Architecture templates. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. the floor or roof remains connected. quantities. 2D and 3D view. the parameter is one of association or connection. As you work in drawing and schedule views. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. sections. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. drawings. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. In this case. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . scope. construction. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. and click Open. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Training Files. and residential. and customize the project as necessary. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. You learn the terminology. the door retains this relationship to the partition. schedules. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built.

Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. For example. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. They display in relevant views of the model. For example. walls. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. Understanding the Basics | 7 .When you change something. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. If you can draw. and keynotes are annotation elements. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. For example. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. filled regions. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. and reference planes are datum elements. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. grids. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. windows. windows. For example. levels. doors. They help to describe or document the model. and roofs are model elements. For example. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. doors. tags. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. For example. dimensions. tags. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Datum elements help to define project context. and 2D detail components. dimensions. programming is not required. Examples include detail lines. and cabinets are model components. walls and roofs are hosts.

views of the project. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. floors. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. first floor. elevation views. such as roofs. In other cases. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. and types. section views. top of wall. By using a single project file. Most often. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. schedules. and ceilings. This information includes components used to design the model. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. for example. However. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. from geometry to construction data. The project file contains all information for the building design. you do nothing to establish these relationships.In Revit Architecture. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. you must be in a section or elevation view. Project: In Revit Architecture. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . you can explicitly control them. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. Often. or bottom of foundation. and so forth). for example. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. To place levels. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. and drawings of the design. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. families. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture.

■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. identical use. For example. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. floors. However. In the steps that follow. A type can be a specific size of a family. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). For example. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. and similar graphical representation. and levels. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. categories of model elements include walls and beams. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. A type can also be a style. ceilings. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). System families include walls. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. dimensions. the user interface is labeled.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. making it easy to understand what each button represents. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. roofs. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. specifically its clear user interface. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . System families can be transferred between projects. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. For example. In the following illustration. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties.

In addition. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. This creates a new project based on the default template. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. By default. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. click (New). 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction .Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface.

While working in the drawing area. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. which are listed on the menu. For example. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. Edit. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. and View. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. you type the required key combination to perform the command. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar.

6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. When you select the Door tool. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. On the left side of the Options Bar. For example. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. when you add a door. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. 9 In the Type Selector. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. a door type is specified. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available.

Navigating the User Interface | 13 . immediately below the Type Selector. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. containing buttons grouped by function. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. In the drawing area.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar.

select Views (all). ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. click the tab in the Design Bar. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. In the Project Browser.11 Click OK. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The respective commands display on the Design Bar.

double-click its name. sheets. family category (doors. delete. windows). The browser is dockable. and groups. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. families. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. reports. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. elevations. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. schedules. To open a view. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. 3D). and group name. walls. families. and rename views.

The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In this case. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. click Wall.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. In the bottom left corner of the window. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. After creating a browser organization scheme. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. Do not click. The cursor displays as a pencil. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. click Cancel.

19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. in conjunction with tooltips. In addition. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. click on the Standard toolbar. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. press F1 for context-sensitive help. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. It highlights when the cursor is over it. You can use this tri-pane. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. Toolbar: From the toolbar. After you are familiar with these tasks. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . There are several tools that help you find information. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. Tooltips: To see tooltips. If no Help button displays. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. 20 Press TAB. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. You can also press SHIFT+F1. find a keyword on the Index tab. When you place the cursor over an element. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.18 On the Design Bar. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. regarding selected elements in a view. Windows: From any window. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. The status bar also provides information. In the status bar. press F1 for help. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. Click the Help button. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. click Modify to end the Wall command.

you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. In the following steps.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. In the drawing area.rvt. For example. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). click Training Files. There are several ways to access zoom options. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. 5 On the View toolbar. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. the view zooms out from the building model.

The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. If you do not have a wheel mouse. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. NOTE As you zoom in and out. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. the view zooms in on the selected area. on the View toolbar. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . 7 Click in the drawing area. As you move the mouse. 10 To display SteeringWheels. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. To modify or add snap increments. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. . When you release the mouse button. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools.

13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. These are the drag controls. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. click Settings menu ➤ Options. To define settings for SteeringWheels. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. Small blue dots. bottoms. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. display along the ends. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. and select the wall. 17 Type ZR. Cnst. Similar controls. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. 15 To exit the wheel. and then using the Zoom tool again. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . and click Help. When drawing or modifying a building model. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. expand Floor Plans. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. and click the SteeringWheels tab. as shown. For more information about SteeringWheels. referred to as shape handles. expand Views (all). press ESC. moving the wheel to the desired location. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. and double-click 2nd Flr. called drag controls. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel.

as shown. 23 Click next to the lower wall. such as Move and Copy. require 2 clicks to complete the command. Some commands. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. click (Move).18 Click and drag the left control. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. and on the Tools toolbar. After selecting the element to move. click to specify the starting position. for example. In this case. to lengthen the wall. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. The table moves down. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. you want to move the table closer to the wall. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. and click again to specify the ending position.

and drag it on top of the table. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. such as the Lines command. 26 On the Undo menu. Some commands. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. click Lines. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. All changes you make to a project are tracked.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. and click again to end it. select the second item in the list. on the Standard toolbar. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. click the Undo command. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Move. In this example. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. or press CTRL+Z. 24 Select the plant. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action.

Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . Press ESC twice. On the Design Bar. click Modify.29 To end the command. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. 30 Close the file without saving your changes.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. Use keynotes to annotate a detail.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. but for training purposes. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. Use detail components to define an assembly. or referenced as a drafting view. In Revit Architecture. this tutorial uses imperial units only. When you have finished these tutorials. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. In this tutorial. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. illustrating how building components work together. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. 27 . detail. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. and annotate building assemblies.

Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. click Training Files. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. click Drafting View. scroll until the folder is displayed. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .rvt. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you will create a drafting view. and reference a drafting view. 3 In the Scale list. enter Window Head Detail. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If necessary. import a DWG detail. for Name. create a reference callout. and click OK. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. 2 In the Drafting View dialog.

and click Open. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. located directly to the left of the drawing area. select Black and White. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. 6 In the Colors field list.dwg. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. displaying the extents of the detail. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. The model zooms out. 10 In the drawing area. 9 Type ZR.). as shown. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. click Training Files.In the Project Browser. The drawing area is still blank. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 .

Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. select Detail View: Detail. 13 Click Reference other view. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Callout. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. in the Type Selector. 14 In the drawing area. to activate the view selection list. and in the Scale list.The view displays to the specified area. 12 On the Options Bar.

and in the Scale list. adjust the detail view display settings. Model-Based Detailing | 31 .rvt. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. in the Type Selector. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”.The reference callout is created. double-click the reference callout tag head. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. 3 In the drawing area. c_express_workshop_details_start. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. select Detail View: Detail. select Callout. 2 On the Options Bar.

The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. enter Wall Base 1. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. 6 In the drawing area. for Name. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. and click OK. 4 Right-click Detail 0. under Detail Views (Detail). under Detail Views(Detail). click Modify to clear the selection. 8 On the Design Bar. double-click Wall Base 1.

10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region. This is the view crop region. Model-Based Detailing | 33 . bordered by a solid line. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area.

12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 16 Click OK. and click OK. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. 14 In the drawing area. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. 13 On the View Control Bar. right-click. for Display Model. click (Hide Crop Region). select As Underlay. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. and click View Properties.

19 In the Type Selector. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium.Brick on Mtl. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . click Detail Components. typical details can easily be placed. Stud.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. Directly above the drawing area. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. 17 On the View Control Bar. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. on the Options Bar. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. type 1' 6''. If the crop region is enlarged. By grouping detail components. and press ENTER. 20 In the drawing area.

Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .22 Press ESC twice to end the command. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. add the following detail components as shown. as shown. and click Create Instance. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. 23 Using the same method. 25 In the Project Browser. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail.

29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously.28 Press ESC to end the command. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 .4" Slab detail. ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation.

Leader. and Free End are selected. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. You can customize this list. or instructions within a construction documentation package. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. In the next exercise. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. and verify that Horizontal. for Full Path.rvt. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. and format keynote styles. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. click Training Files. map keynotes by material. click Browse. For more information about customizing a keynote database. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Keynote ➤ Element. special notes.txt. 4 On the Options Bar. c_express_workshop_details_start. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. in the type selector. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and under Keynote Table. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail.

If no value has been specified. 9 Press ESC to end the command.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. Keynoting | 39 .5 In the drawing area. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. a question mark displays. 7 Click to place the leader arm. If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. Either move the text inside. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. 8 Click to place the tag.

40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click OK. 13 Click to place the tag. You will now change all keynotes to keys only. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. 15 Select 07 21 00. click Keynote ➤ Material. 12 Click to place the leader arm. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. 16 In the drawing area.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation.

click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . Creating Details with Revit Architecture. Click Check None.All items within the selection display in red. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. Click OK. 19 In the Type Selector. legends. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. Only the keynotes remain selected. Select Keynote Tags. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values.Boxed. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. 17 On the Options Bar.

Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. Place views on drawing sheets. Update drawing sheet and project information. this tutorial uses imperial units only. and modify and update the project sheet title block. update the project information element properties. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . In this exercise. but for training purposes. In this lesson. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. Add labels to a title block. you will create a sheet.

and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. click Training Files. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. In the Project Browser. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. or in the element properties of the title block. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. 3 Click OK. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.rvt. scroll until the folder is displayed. In Revit Architecture. If necessary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all).

You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel.Unnamed. enter A602. 6 In the Title Block. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. In this tutorial. Then. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. Smith and press ENTER. enter Sections/Details. hold down the wheel and drag. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. roll the wheel. click Modify to clear the selection. To zoom in and out. 8 On the Design Bar. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. Click OK. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Project Browser. double-click Checker. and click Rename. right-click A602 . which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on.4 Type ZR. 7 Enter K. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. For Name. under Sheets(all). To pan. you can enter ZE to zoom out. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. 5 In the drawing area.

13 Click OK. enter Freighthouse Flats.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. The Family Editor opens. For Project Name. enter J. Smith. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. enter Design Development. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . select the title block. click Text. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. 18 On the Options Bar. select Text : 1/8''. For Client Name. 16 Type ZR. 20 Click and type Project Status. 17 On the Design Bar. For Project Status. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. (Left) is selected. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. in the Type Selector. enter 4/10/2008. 15 In the Options Bar.

click Label. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown.21 On the Design Bar. and verify that (Top) are selected. and click OK. 23 On the Design Bar. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. 22 Using the same method. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. select Label : 3/16''. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. to add 28 Using the same method. and click. add Project Issue Date parameter. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Modify to exit the command. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. as shown. as shown. 29 On the Design Bar. click (Load into Project). in the Type Selector. under Category Parameters.

click Browse. click Training Files. you will create.txt. to a drawing sheet. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. select Override parameter values of existing types. and under Keynote Table. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Keynote Legend . Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 .Project. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. In this exercise.30 In the Reload Family dialog. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. Next you will create. representing the view or schedule. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. for Name. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. for Full Path. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. a viewport displays. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. and click Yes. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. place and modify a keynote legend.

expand Legends. under Text. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. and drag Keynote Legend . 8 In the Project Browser.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. clear Show Headers. as shown. under Sheets (all). Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. double-click A601 . on the Appearance tab. and click OK.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet.Sections/Details. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown. 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet. The keynote legend is visible. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection.Project as shown. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend .9 Press ESC to clear the selection.

Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Keynote Legend . under Legends. for View Name.Project. select Filter by sheet. click Edit. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. The Keynote Legend is now blank.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. at the bottom of the Filter tab. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 19 Click OK twice. and click Properties. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. 15 In the Project Browser. for Filter. not keynotes. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. expand Detail Views (Detail). enter Keynote Legend . as shown.Sheet. and click OK.

The view remains selected.Title Sheet 1. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. under Sheets (all). and then add and update a Drawing list. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. The view title with line displays below the viewport. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. 2 In the Project Browser. double-click A0 . Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. as shown.The keynote legend is automatically updated. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet.

Revit Architecture displays a view title. The drawing list remains selected. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. expand Schedules/Quantities. and zoom in on the drawing list. define the information to include in a view title. or omit view titles from sheets. 3 In the Type Selector. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. as shown. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. As part of a construction document set. You can specify text attributes for view titles. Press ESC to clear the selection. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed.When you place a view on a sheet. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. 5 In the Project Browser. 6 Type ZR. by default. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. right-click the selected sheets. The drawing list display is updated. 8 In the Project Browser.Sections/Details and select A801 . select A602 . NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. under Sheets (all). Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . including only sheets that contain views. clear Appears In Drawing List. and click Properties.Ceiling Plans. while pressing SHIFT. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. and click OK.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

For example. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. the wall or column will move with it. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. If the grid moves. 57 . and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. a curtain wall. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. a central service core. it is good practice to test the constraints. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. As you develop the building design. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. After the beginning exercises. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model.

views. from the product library. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. 4 In the left pane of the dialog.rte. 3 Under Template file. but contains no geometry. you use a template that is provided with the software. select Project. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. Creating the Project In this exercise. construction. and customize the project as necessary. For this project. In the drawing area in the right pane. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. click New. click Training Files. you design inside the elevation markers. notice four elevation markers. locate the Project Browser. levels. you will use the default template. East. South. under Projects. such as a door or window. with an RVT extension. West. verify that the second option is selected. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. In practice. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. and residential. In views that display elevation markers. under Create new. The project is stored as a single file. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. 2 In the New Project dialog.subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. The new project opens. and click Browse. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. 5 Click OK. and settings. To create the project file. you load any required family type that is not in your project.

change their properties. 8 Under Floor Plans. Families. display in the south elevation. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. you will want to save your work frequently. 13 In the file window.rvt) is selected. 16 Click Save. 10 In the Project Browser. NOTE If you create a project without a template. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. will be accessible from the Project Browser. and click Training Files. and elevation views created in the project by the template. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. reflected ceiling plan views. and Elevations (Building Elevation). As you design and document your building model. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). sheets. enter Revit Retail Building. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. You can add. and on the General tab. delete. Schedules/Quantities. Ceiling Plans. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). double-click Metric. expand Views (all). notice the Legends. double-click South. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Two level lines. and duplicate levels. then expand Floor Plans. created by the template. 7 If necessary. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model.The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. These views are customizable: you can rename them. 14 For File name. and families in your project. Groups. content and building model reports.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. and delete them. view the Save reminder interval. as well as change their names. Creating the Project | 59 . verify that Project Files (*. such as schedules and legends. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. and other properties. schedules. Sheets (all). heights. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. duplicate them. 15 For Save as type. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. the view you see in the drawing area.

or constrained. and double-click South. the other levels move and change with it. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . When you begin designing. Adding Project Levels on page 60. After you modify the two default levels. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. to each other. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. enter 00 Foundation. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. doors. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. expand Views (all). and windows within the building model. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text.17 Proceed to the next exercise. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. and press ENTER. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. so that when one level moves. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. You change the names of the 2 default levels. You learn how the levels are locked. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser.

(You do not have to click to specify the start point. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. enter 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. right-click. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. which should display by default. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. 14 Click Plan View Types.4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. click Level. and press ENTER. enter 0. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. When you add the new level. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. Next. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. and press ESC. and click Basics. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. and then move it up. 16 Enter 3750. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. 13 On the Options Bar. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. view the Design Bar. As you move the cursor. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. enter -1800. Adding Project Levels | 61 . and click OK. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. not all the tabs are visible. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. This is the Options Bar. By default. 5 In the Project Browser. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. If it does not.

you add another level. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. click (Pick Lines).18 In the Project Browser. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. and move it slightly upward. click Level. and enter 02 Level. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. 26 Press ESC. under Floor Plans. 19 Click OK. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. right-click Level 3. 23 On the Options Bar. click Modify to end the command. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. click Rename. and for Offset. 21 In the Project Browser. using a different option. 25 Click to place the level line. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. If you create a level by copying it. enter 3750. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. Next. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. or on the Design Bar. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and rename the corresponding views.

Adding Project Levels | 63 . If you select a level and click its lock. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. and you can move them independently. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. all the levels move. the levels are no longer constrained. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that by moving the top level. as shown.

Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. Move the cursor up. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. When the grid is complete. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. so that if the roof elevation changes. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. click Grid. and specify the grid line endpoint. under Floor Plans.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. select (Draw). In a later exercise. In the following exercise. double-click 00 Foundation. the column height changes as well. 3 On the Options Bar. specify a start point for the grid line. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. On the Design Bar. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. click Modify.

enter 4500 mm. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Offset. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. and for Offset. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. and press ENTER. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . Click to place the grid line. and click to place the line. enter 7500 mm. Next. On the Options Bar. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. and click to place the line.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. and click to place the line. Enter A. enter 7500 mm. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. On the Options Bar. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. click Grid. for Offset. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. click (Pick Lines).

8 Press ESC. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. as shown. 11 On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. click Grid. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. and specify the grid line endpoint. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. click Grid.

16 When you select the last vertical grid line. 18 On the Design Bar. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. click Dimension. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. select grid lines C and 3. Creating a Column Grid | 67 . click (Aligned). 15 Starting with grid line A. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. click Dimension. 22 While pressing CTRL.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. 21 Press ESC twice. 14 On the Options Bar.

and click OK. and on the Options Bar. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click . The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. enter 50mm. click Modify. The pins are hidden. until it is closer to grid line A. (Element Properties). 26 In the drawing area. and select None. 24 Press ESC. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. and select grid line A. By pinning these central grid lines. and press ESC. enter 6. and press ESC. click and drag the blue circular grip up. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. 29 In the Name dialog. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. 30 In the Type Properties dialog.5mm Bubble with Gap. If necessary. Two pins display on the grid lines.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. click Edit/New. click the value for Center Segment. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . ■ ■ Select grid line 1. At the left endpoint of the grid line. 32 Click OK twice. 33 On the Design Bar. 31 For End Segments Length. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. click Duplicate. select grid line 5. click Modify. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. until it is closer to grid line 5.

click Structural Column.5mm Bubble. For Place By. 37 Select the grid lines again. click (Grid Intersection). The original continuous grid lines are restored. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. 35 In the Type Selector.34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. 36 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select Grid : 6. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select Grid : 6. select all of the grid lines. click Finish. Creating a Column Grid | 69 .5mm Bubble with Gap. and press ESC. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. and in the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). 39 In the Type Selector.

You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. 47 Enter 9000. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. click Camera. click Activate Dimensions. select 01 Entry Level. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. Next. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 52 On the Options Bar. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and unlock it. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. If it is unlocked. double-click 01 Entry Level. 46 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. for From. 48 On the Standard toolbar. select grid line A. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. 45 While pressing CTRL. 43 Press ESC. lock it. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B.

Creating a Column Grid | 71 . and click to place the target point of the camera. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A.

named 3D View 1 by default. expand 3D Views. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and then copy them to subsequent levels. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. and click OK. enter To Building. displays in bold under 3D Views. 57 Proceed to the next exercise.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. When you finish adding beams. Adding Beams In this exercise. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. The current view. Right-click 3D View 1. and click Rename. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. under Views (all). Adding Beams on page 72. In the Rename View dialog.

under 3D Views. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. 6 In the Type Selector. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. under Floor Plans. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. double-click 01 Entry Level. click (Create Beam On Grid). which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. select each grid line. view the icons on the View Control Bar. 10 In the Project Browser. Adding Beams | 73 . click Beam. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. The view is currently set to Coarse. 8 While pressing CTRL. The selected grid lines display as red. 9 On the Options Bar. click Finish. the icon on the right side of the scale. 4 Click Medium. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. 7 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 3 Click the Detail Level icon .

13 On the Design Bar. select 02 Level. and click OK. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. right-click. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. press and hold SHIFT. and click Select All Instances. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. click Modify. 14 Select one of the beams. select 06 Roof. 12 On the View toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. click (Default 3D View). 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines.

under Instance Parameters. When you created the columns. and click OK. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. and if necessary. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 06 Roof. for Top Level. Adding Beams | 75 . select 06 Roof. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. and click Element Properties. 25 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building. 22 On the Options Bar. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. 20 Click Cancel. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. All of the columns display as red. click 24 Press ESC. and click Select All Instances. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. resize the view to see the entire structure. 21 With the column selected. under Constraints. right-click. (Element Properties). view the Top Level parameter. but it would only change the height of the single selected column.to the 5th level. right-click.

The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. as lines only. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click South. 28 Save the drawing. but you want to display them in less detail. under Elevations.

3 On the Options Bar. Adding Braces In this exercise. you create 8 framing elevation views.29 Proceed to the next exercise. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. Adding Braces | 77 . Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. Adding Braces on page 77. click Framing Elevation. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. and press ESC to end the command. To better add the braces to the structure. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. double-click 00 Foundation.

verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. 11 Using the same technique. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. and when the endpoint snap displays. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). NOTE Do not copy or array braces. 7 On the Design Bar. press ESC twice. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. double-click the elevation marker arrow.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. After you add the final brace. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. The associated framing elevation view displays. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. click Brace. but when placed the braces are placed. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 8 In the Type Selector. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. click to specify the start point of the brace.

IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. and press ENTER. delete it and redraw it. enter 18000 mm. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. The height of the roof lowers. Adding Braces | 79 .

17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. but this time add them from right to left. and press ENTER. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. 14 On the Standard toolbar. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . enter 10000 mm.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. under Floor Plans. double-click 00 Foundation.

22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). and press ENTER. 19 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. enter 12000 mm. NOTE As you add braces. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. under Floor Plans. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. click Activate Dimensions. and on the Options Bar. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. as shown in the 3D view below. 21 Select grid line A.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. Adding Braces | 81 . and click the lock that displays to unlock it.

82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 29 In the Project Browser. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. double-click South. and if necessary. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. 26 In the Project Browser. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. double-click 00 Foundation. click and roof height. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. and drag it away from the structure. beams. lock it. Creating a Foundation on page 82. 32 Proceed to the next exercise.24 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. under 3D Views. under Elevations. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. 28 On the Standard toolbar. 31 Save the drawing. grid size. double-click {3D}. Test connectivity of the columns.

Creating a Foundation | 83 . 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. and how to load specific families into a project. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree.rfa. The pile cap has been added in the view. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). Click OK twice. under Extents. In the Element Properties dialog. The foundation pile cap now displays. click Training Files. expand Families. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. for View Range. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. A warning displays. 9 Close the warning dialog. select Unlimited. for Level. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. After you load the pile cap family. double-click 00 Foundation. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. under Floor Plans. and drag it to the drawing area. and press ESC twice. and expand Structural Foundations. click Edit. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. In the View Range dialog.Before you can add the pile caps. under View Depth. and click View Properties. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them.

press ESC twice. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. 13 In the Project Browser.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. and click Create Similar. under 3D Views. When the final pile cap is placed. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

rvt. All columns in the building model display as red. and brace families into the project. right-click. click Training Files. under 3D Views. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. You load new column. beams. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. you change the types of the columns. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. 2 Select one of the columns. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. and braces that you used to create the building structure.14 Close the file with or without saving it. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. double-click {3D}. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . and click Select All Instances. beam. It is not available in a perspective or camera view.

13 In the Name dialog.2X101. 18 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. In the following steps. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. This not the size that you want to use. you change the brace type. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. 15 In the Project Browser. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. the braces as well as the beams change. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. enter 75mm. and click OK twice. click (Element Properties). Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 In the Type Selector.9. 17 While pressing CTRL. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. The building model displays the round hollow columns.3 In the Type Selector.5CHS. 19 On the Design Bar. but it is the only size of its type currently available. and click Select All Instances. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. click (Default 3D View). select M_Round Bar : 25mm. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. select the braces in the elevation one by one. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. click Modify. double-click Elevation 1-a. 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. under Dimensions. click Edit/New. and click OK. right-click. click Brace. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. 4 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 On the Design Bar. The brace type changes. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). 9 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Options Bar. for Type. for d. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . enter 75mm.6X15. and changing its size parameter. click Modify.

and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural.Origin to Origin. Linking the Structural Model on page 87. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . 3 Under Positioning. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. click Training Files.rvt. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Auto . After the files are linked.rvt. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. and click Open.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. select m_RRB_structure_complete. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. structural members. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. 6 In the drawing area. In this case. under Elevations. and walls could also be copy/monitored. depending on the project. After the link is established. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. select Multiple. select the linked Revit model. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. and click Select Link. Grids. click Copy. select Levels 00 through 06. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. 9 In the drawing area. click (Copy/Monitor). 5 On the Tools toolbar.4 In the Project Browser. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click South. while pressing CTRL. however. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. 8 On the Options Bar.

Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. 16 Click OK. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. under Floor Plans. while pressing SHIFT. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information.10 On the Options Bar. and click Delete. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). click OK. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Finish mode. 15 In the New Plan dialog. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. 13 On the Design Bar. 18 Using the same method. for Floor Plan views. delete the Level 2 floor plan. right-click Level 1. First. click Finish.

and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 26 In the Project Browser. 25 In the View Templates dialog. right-click. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. double-click 01 Entry Level. select the Topography : Surface. double-click 00 Foundation. for Name.19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 20 In the drawing area. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. under Floor Plans. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. 21 In the drawing area. and click OK. enter Floor Plans. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. click OK. 24 In the New View Template dialog. right-click.

31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Floor Plans. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . double-click Site. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. click Camera. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. under Names. 34 In the 3D view that displays. under Floor Plans. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. and click OK. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template.

you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. In this exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Some other Revit Architecture elements. right-click 3D View 1. stairs. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding Floors on page 92. To create floors.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and railings are also created from sketches. such as roofs. enter To Building. 36 In the Rename View dialog. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. click Training Files. Adding Floors In this exercise. and click OK.35 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. expand 3D Views. and click Rename.

You are now in the Sketch Editor. past the first vertical grid line. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. and elements in the current view display as gray. click (Rectangle). On the Sketch tab. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. and then the first horizontal grid line. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. Leave this dimension unlocked. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. double-click 01 Entry Level.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. click Floor. If the grid changes size. under Floor Plans. At the top left corner of the grid. select the top floor line. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. Adding Floors | 93 . Do not lock the dimension. click Dimension. Move the cursor to the left. click Lines.

and click the temporary dimension value. press ENTER. ■ 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. They display on the floor sketch. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Finish Sketch to create the floor. Move the cursor to the left dimension. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. Enter 300. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. select the top floor line. At the top left corner of the grid. and then press ESC. Do not lock the dimensions. Select and lock the dimensions. and change their values to 300 mm.

You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. click Edit. double-click 02 Level. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. enter 1500mm. and lock the dimensions. click Floor. Next. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid.8 Select the floor. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. and press ESC. click Lines. Adding Floors | 95 . and on the Options Bar. click Quit Sketch. click (Pick Lines). and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. On the Sketch tab. Select the three remaining floor lines. and for Offset. under Floor Plans. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. using a different sketching technique. On the Options Bar. on the Design Bar.

14 On the Design Bar. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. click (Rectangle). 18 On the Options Bar. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 03 Level. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. click Lines. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. click (Align). 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. and a lock icon displays. click Floor. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. under Floor Plans. The 02 Level floor displays. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. 20 On the Tools toolbar.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. 17 On the Sketch tab. 16 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. Click the locks to constrain the floors.

28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and click OK. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. 35 On the Sketch tab. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. double-click {3D}. click Finish Sketch. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. 32 Select the floor. select 05 Roof Garden. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. under Views ➤ 3D Views. click Edit. click Finish Sketch. double-click 01 Entry Level. 31 In the Project Browser. and lock the edges. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level.24 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. Adding Floors | 97 . View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. Alternatively. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. under Floor Plans.

4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. Adding a Roof In this exercise. enter 1800 mm. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. click Training Files. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Click (Pick Lines). 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. click to place the roof line. click Lines. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. To create the roof. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. When a blue dashed line displays.rvt. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ For Offset. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. double-click 06 Roof. Adding a Roof on page 98. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E.

9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). enter 300 mm. and when the blue dashed line displays.6 Select grid line 5. click to place the roof line. for Offset. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. Adding a Roof | 99 . 7 On the Options Bar. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left).

click Finish Roof.10 Press ESC. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. ■ 12 On the Design Bar. select the roof. click (Trim/Extend). 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area.

16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. and press ENTER.14 On the Options Bar. enter -100 mm. on grid D. 15 On the Options Bar. move the cursor down below the roof. and click to specify the section. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Elevation. 17 On the Design Bar. Adding a Roof | 101 . click Section. click Modify. click (Add new points to the slab shape). The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point.

double-click 06 Roof. click Edit. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Edit/New. 30 Click OK 3 times. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. select the roof.20 On the Design Bar. (Element Properties). click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. In section. under Floor Plans. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. select Variable. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. for Structure [1]. under Construction. for Structure. and on the Options Bar. 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. click Modify. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 24 In the Project Browser. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower).

click OK.31 On the Design Bar. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. and press DELETE. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 37 If necessary. 41 Starting with the left front edge. zoom in to the roof. Adding a Roof | 103 . on the View Control Bar. 38 In the 3D view. click Modify. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. select the section line. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. moving counter-clockwise. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. 33 In the warning dialog. In this case. select each edge. select Fascia : Fascia .Roof Edge. click (Default 3D View). 40 In the Type Selector. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you add a curtain wall. under 3D Views. click Modify.42 On the Design Bar. the curtain wall resizes with it. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. so if you resize the grid.

click Wall. enter 600 mm. For Offset. click to place the first curtain wall segment. for Spacing. enter 2100 mm. Click OK twice. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. for Spacing. click Training Files. for Join Condition.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. For Height. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. select 01 Entry Level. click Duplicate. 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. and click OK. enter 1050 mm. for Type. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and move it slightly toward the building interior.rvt. Under Construction. enter Retail Storefront. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). select Curtain Wall : Storefront. When you duplicate a type. The type is saved in the project. For Level. select 05 Roof Garden. under Floor Plans. click 01 Entry Level. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties).

dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 13 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. double-click To Building. and trim each curtain wall segment. and lock the dimensions. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. so they remain in the view. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. click (Trim/Extend). under 3D Views. If the grid moves. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. If you want to hide them. you can delete the dimensions.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. These dimensions are not in a sketch. 15 On the View Control Bar. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

rvt. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. Creating an Entrance | 107 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. Creating an Entrance on page 107. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. click Training Files. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

under the element list. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 2 On the View Control Bar. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. clear one element to clear all the elements. 4 On the Model Categories tab. click All. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. and double-click South. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. under Views (all). and click None. To better work with the curtain wall panels. 5 Under Visibility. 6 Under Visibility. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 7 Click OK.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). as these usually represent internal pilasters. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Do not select Columns. All the elements in the list are selected. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. in the Type Selector. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. in this case an architectural elevation. 10 Select 1 panel. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. Creating an Entrance | 109 . 12 With the panels selected. 18 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. 16 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. press and hold CTRL. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. select Architectural Elevation. 17 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. select System Panel : Solid. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. double-click {3D}.9 On the Design Bar. and click OK. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected.

double-click To Building.19 In the Project Browser. 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Elevations (Building Elevation). 20 In the Project Browser. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. double-click South. under 3D Views.

click Add or Remove Segments. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. click Curtain Grid. select another mullion to the right. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. Creating an Entrance | 111 . and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. 30 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Type Selector. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. select One Segment. and click to select it. and unpin it. 27 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 24 On the Options Bar.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line.

112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and unpin it. press TAB until it is selected. click (Default 3D View). 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. select it. 34 On the View toolbar.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. and view the new entrance. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. 36 Zoom in to the first panel.

40 Optionally. 39 Using the same process. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 . Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. 3rd.38 Press DELETE. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. remove the mullions from the 2nd. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. and 4th panels. open the North elevation. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building.

double-click 01 Entry Level. 5 Click OK. click Training Files. and click View Properties. for Underlay. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. 3 Right-click in the view.rvt. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select 02 Level. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. under Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser.

9 In the Project Browser. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . which indicates you must draw the callout. enter Display Area.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to complete the callout. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. 10 In the Rename View dialog. select the grip closest to the callout head. click Callout. under Floor Plans. 8 Select the callout. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. and click OK. The cursor changes to a pencil. and click Rename. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column.

right-click. and click Flip Section. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section.Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 14 Press ESC. 13 Select the section line. as shown. 12 Draw a section line. click Section. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 16 Select the section box.

select Wall faces. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). Click (Rectangle). select Finish Face: Exterior. click Dimension. click (Align). double-click 01 Entry Level. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. for Prefer. click Wall. under Floor Plans. 21 In the Type Selector. 18 In the Rename View dialog. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. 24 On the Tools toolbar. select Basic Wall : Interior . enter Section Display Area. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. 26 On the Design Bar. expand Sections (Building Section).17 In the Project Browser. Lock both alignments. 27 On the Options Bar. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 25 Press ESC twice. right-click Section 1.135mm Partition (2-hr). and click OK. For Loc Line. and click Rename. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 .

click Ceiling. under Sections (Building Section). 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. double-click 01 Entry Level.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. 37 In the Project Browser.) 36 Press ESC twice. under Ceiling Plans. 38 On the View Control Bar. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. and lock the dimension. 32 In the Type Selector. Next. double-click Section Display Area. and lock the dimension. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. Notice that the walls extend to the floor.

42 In the Element Properties dialog. and click (Element Properties). Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . double-click 01 Entry Level. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. click Attach. press TAB until you select the wall chain.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. 46 Press ESC. click (Element Properties). for Height Offset From Level. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. and click OK. enter 2700 mm. under Constraints. and press ESC. and click to select the walls. enter 2700 mm. for Base Offset. and click to select the walls. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. double-click Section Display Area. 47 In the Project Browser. Select the 02 Level Floor. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. for Top/Base. On the Options Bar. 43 On the Design Bar. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. under Sections. click Modify. under Ceiling Plans. 41 On the Options Bar. under Constraints. click to select it.

click Cancel. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Rotate). under Construction. 54 Click OK. under Ceiling Plans. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog.49 In the Project Browser. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. click Edit. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 56 In the Element Properties dialog. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. and click . view the ceiling structure. click Cancel. click Edit/New. for Structure. double-click 01 Entry Level. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. for Type. 58 On the Edit toolbar. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling.

enter 45. 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. 61 Press ESC. and press ENTER. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 .60 Click.

click Shadows On. 64 On the View Control Bar. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. 65 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows Off. double-click To Building.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. 66 Optionally.

3 On the Options Bar. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. click Training Files. and click to create a reference plane to the left. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and for Offset. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. and click to create a reference plane to the right. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. and copy it to the 05 Level. click Ref Plane. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building.rvt. enter 1500 mm. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). Move the cursor over grid line B.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

click Modify. 6 Select the left reference plane. C. click Stairs. 2.5 On the Design Bar. and specify a point to create first stair flight. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 Using the same method. and 3. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. shorten the right reference plane.

Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . including its handrails. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. select Finish Face: Interior. 12 In the Type Selector. beyond the end of the stair. ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. The complete stair displays. select Basic Wall : Generic . 10 On the Options Bar. and specify a point.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left.225mm Masonry. click Wall. and select the 2nd reference plane. Click (Rectangle). Move the cursor down.

16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. 18 Using the same technique. select Wall faces. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. for Prefer. select the dimension value. and specify a point away from the wall. click Align. Lock the dimension. click Dimension. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. and click to select it. Click Modify. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. Select the interior face of the wall.15 On the Tools toolbar. and press ENTER. Select the wall. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and lock the alignment. Select the bottom of the stair. enter 1200 mm.

22 Click OK to delete the dimension. TIP To flip the door swing. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. 25 While pressing CTRL. a warning displays. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. click Door. The stair and walls move to the left. and press DELETE. 23 Select the stair. 27 In the Type Selector. 28 On the Options Bar. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. and press DELETE. Because the dimension is constrained. clear Tag on Placement. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. select both reference planes. 24 On the Standard toolbar. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . (Undo). click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar.21 Select the dimension.

You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. Under Constraints. 44 On the Tools toolbar. under Floor Plans. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. Click OK. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. but if you view the top level of the building. (Rectangle). 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. for Multistory Top Level.30 On the Design Bar. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. and move the cursor to spin the building model. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. double-click 01 Entry Level. (Default 3D View). click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. 33 Select the stair. click 36 On the View toolbar. select 05 Roof Garden. click Modify. 35 On the View toolbar. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. For Top Constraint. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). select all 4 walls. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. (Element Properties). verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . for Base Constraint. Click OK. select 00 Foundation. (SteeringWheels). click Align.

Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. click see the roof. and lock the alignment. (SteeringWheels). 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and lock the alignments. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. 52 In the Select Levels dialog. click (Default 3D View). select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. on the View toolbar.46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. and click OK. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar.

Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. for Base Offset. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. 56 Select the shaft. (SteeringWheels). NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 01 Entry Level. For Top Constraint. Under Constraints. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. click 59 On the View toolbar. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. By offsetting the base. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). and click OK. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. (Default 3D View). under Floor Plans. enter 300 mm.55 In the Project Browser. ■ 58 On the View toolbar.

for Underlay. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. and click OK. and click View Properties. under Floor Plans.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click 05 Roof Garden. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . click Wall. 2 Right-click in the view. select 06 Roof.

6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. click Edit Profile. and then select the right face of the wall.5 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER. and click Open View. click Lines. 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. select Basic Wall : Generic . 15 In the error dialog. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. and on the Options Bar. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. 17 On the Options Bar. Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. click . 11 In the Go To View dialog.225mm Masonry. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Align). 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. enter 9750. The exact placement is not important. click Remove Constraints. and click (Fillet arc). 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. 7 On the Tools toolbar. select Elevation: South. 16 On the Design Bar.

as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. click . 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc. under 3D Views. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . 22 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. double-click {3D}. and click (Circle).18 In the upper right corner of the profile.

24 Proceed to the next exercise. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views.

click Component. between grid lines C and D. click Training Files. as shown. 5 On the Basics tab. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Planter : 1220 x 1220. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. TIP After you place the 1st planter.5 Meters. select M_RPC Tree . 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . 6 In the Type Selector. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector. double-click 05 Roof Garden. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . click Component. and press ESC twice. under Floor Plans.4.

enter 2400 mm. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Click Apply. 18 In the Project Browser. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 11 Select one of the trees. click Duplicate. under Floor Plans.5 Meters. 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. enter 1500 mm. for Height. View the roof. click Floor. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Edit/New. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Project Browser. enter Japanese Cherry 1. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under 3D Views. as shown. select the 2 remaining trees. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest.8 On the View toolbar. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. 17 While pressing CTRL. 14 In the Name dialog. click Lines. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. select M_RPC Tree . click (Default 3D View). and click OK. double-click {3D}. under Dimensions.5 Meters. (Element Properties).Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. and in the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. for Type. For Offset. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. and then click OK twice. 13 In the Type Properties dialog.

24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. click (Draw). and click to place the line. 29 On the Options Bar. and click to sketch a line. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. for Offset. enter 0 mm. and click to sketch a line.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. 25 Using the same method. 26 On the Options Bar. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. 28 Select the right vertical floor line.

click (Trim/Extend).30 On the Options Bar. 34 On the Tools toolbar. move the cursor up 900 mm. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. and click to finish the line. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 35 Select the line that you just drew. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. and click to finish the line. clear Chain. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. 32 Press ESC. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm.

The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. click Edit/New. and on the Options Bar.38 On the Design Bar. for Height Offset from Level. near Column E5. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. 45 Click OK. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . When you render an image. In plan view. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. click Finish Sketch. for Type. as shown: (Element Properties). select M_RPC Male : Alex. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. 39 Select the sidewalk. enter -250 mm. The completed sidewalk displays. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 43 Click OK twice. 48 In the Type Selector. select Rotate after placement. click Component. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. click Duplicate. Next. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. 49 On the Options Bar. enter Sidewalk. 42 In the Name dialog. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. a photorealistic image displays. and click so he is facing the column.

select M_RPC Beetle. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). and click (Element Properties).NOTE If necessary. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. click Camera. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. 52 In the Type Selector. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 54 In the Type Selector. 56 Press ESC twice. and click to place her on the sidewalk. click the car. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. about 30 degrees. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown.

65 Click the sidewalk. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. and on the Options Bar. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. 60 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building.59 In the Element Properties dialog. click Pick Host. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. click Pick Host. When you select a host for a component. If the sidewalk changes height. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. 66 Using the same method. and click OK. 64 Select Alex. for Offset. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. under Constraints. enter -300 mm. and on the Options Bar. double-click West. 63 Click the sidewalk. under Elevations. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. Next. under 3D Views.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and replace them with a service core. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . After the service core is positioned. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building.

click (Default 3D View). you delete the entire stairwell.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Select the entire stairwell. 4 Press DELETE. under Floor Plans. walls. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. click 6 On the View toolbar. click Training Files.rvt. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. 5 On the View toolbar. including the stairs. double-click 05 Roof Garden. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. and shaft opening. (SteeringWheels). Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building.

and on the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click 00 Foundation. click Training Files. click Modify. right-click m_RRB_core. 10 In the Project Browser. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and open Metric\m_RRB_core. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and zoom in to the linked instance. click (Align). 14 In the Project Browser. and notice that the linked file is listed. expand Groups. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group.rvt. click OK. double-click 01 Entry Level. 11 In the Project Browser. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. expand Model. 13 In the drawing area.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. under Floor Plans. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2.

click Modify. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. ■ ■ Click grid line C. 19 On the Design Bar. 18 Select the core. click Modify. 20 On the View toolbar.16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . click 21 On the View toolbar. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. (Default 3D View). click (top down view). 17 On the Design Bar. and click to align the center. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. (SteeringWheels). click Ungroup. or if the group layout is expected to change. and on the Options Bar.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 22 Proceed to the final exercise.rvt. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After you modify it. you add glass railings around the floor edges. where it is hosted within a railing family. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Training Files. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You copy the railing type into your project from another project. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise.

double-click 02 Level. 8 In the Project Browser. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. click Edit. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. and select Glass. press and hold CTRL. and expand Railings. and click to split the floor. 3 In the Conference project. expand Renderings. in the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.rvt.rvt. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. and Parapet. The rendering displays. 13 On the Tools toolbar. The floor sketch displays. and double-click Lounge Perspective. 5 Expand Railing. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. expand Families. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. Handrail only. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. and on the Options Bar. click OK. click (Split). click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Conference.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open.

148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click to draw another line. and click the lock to lock the alignment. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. 25 Select grid line B. and on the Options Bar. verify that Chain is not selected. 18 On the Design Bar. and click to draw another line. and click to place it. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. click Modify. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor.15 On the Design Bar. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. click (Align). 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. click Lines. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long.

27 On the Tools toolbar. click Railing Properties. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. click Dimension. and click the lock to lock the alignment.26 Select grid line D. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. Lock the dimensions. click Finish Sketch. and lock the alignment. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. For Offset. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 31 In the Revit dialog. and click OK.rvt project. click (Align). 30 On the Design Bar. click Railing. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 33 On the Design Bar. for Type. 29 On the Design Bar. select Glass. enter 100 mm.

41 Place the camera and camera target as shown.37 On the Design Bar. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. click Camera. 39 Click Finish Sketch. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension.

Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. You can view the railing that you just added. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

43 Close all project drawings. 152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. balconies. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. NOTE For training purposes. exterior fire stairs. and a roof garden. lofty ceilings. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. 153 . the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. slight modifications to the building design have been made. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. We wish to thank BNIM Architects.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials.

154 .

155 . section. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. you learn how to create views from a building model. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. elevation. how to create section and elevation views. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. including plan. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. You learn how to create new views from existing views.

Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Floor Plans.rvt. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser.

2 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. 7 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. select Level 2. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 9 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. 4 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK.

Next. click the current scale. under Floor Plans. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 11 Under Floor Plans. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. 14 On the View Control Bar. 12 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Vicinity Plan. and click OK. 13 In the Project Browser. and click 1: 1000. double-click Vicinity Plan.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename.

15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 16 Right-click.

NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. click Elevation. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. for Scale. under Floor Plans. select Elevation: Building Elevation. select 1:100.rvt. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector. 4 On the Options Bar.

7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. 8 On the Design Bar. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify. click Modify. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 .Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar.

Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. and click OK. for Scale. select Section: Building Section. click Section. enter South East. and double-click Level 1. select 1:100. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 10 In the Rename View dialog. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all). double-click South East. under Elevations. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. expand Floor Plans. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 15 On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor down. 14 In the Type Selector. 11 In the Project Browser. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3.

Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 . and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.

164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Split Segment.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. and click to place it. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. Click the midpoint of the section line. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

expand Sections (Building Section). and double-click Section 1. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . using the blue circular drag grip. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. 24 Select gridline F. click Modify. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. 23 On the View Control Bar. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble.21 On the Design Bar.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view.25 On the Design Bar. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. To create each view. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. 4 On the Options Bar. for Scale. click Callout. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 3 In the Type Selector.rvt. and click to specify a point to complete the callout.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select 1:50. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. under Floor Plans. Creating Callout Views | 167 . select Floor Plan.Resulting callout view . Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser.

Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. and select the callout boundary. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. ■ Select the middle grip. click Modify.6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and move it to the left side of the callout boundary.

8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 14 On the Options Bar. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. under Sections (Building Sections). Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. select Detail View: Detail. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. select 1:50. and click OK. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. click Callout. 13 In the Type Selector. 9 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Section 1.7 On the Design Bar. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. for Scale. click Modify. Creating Callout Views | 169 .

170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .■ Move the cursor diagonally down. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 16 Modify the callout leader as shown.

18 In the Rename View dialog. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views | 171 . double-click Roof Overhang Detail. and click OK. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter Roof Overhang Detail. under Detail Views (Details).17 In the Project Browser. expand Detail Views (Details).

Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Open. select Custom-Section Head.rvt.rfa. under Floor Plans. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. You change the appearance of the section mark head. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. click Training Files. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. the elevation markers. open Metric\Families\Annotations. double-click Level 1. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

and click OK. 8 In the Name dialog. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . select the current project. select Section Head . click Edit/New. enter 12. scroll to Section Line. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. 15 Under Category. 22 In the Name dialog. click Load into Project. click Duplicate. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. select the section line. 4 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. Section Tail – Filled. On the floor plan. and click OK. click Duplicate. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and can be applied to the section line. 17 Under Category.Custom. . 14 In the Object Styles dialog.5mm Square. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. scroll to Section Marks. for Section Head. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. and select 2. and select 3. 12 For Section Tag. enter Section Head – Custom.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. and click OK twice. 10 On the floor plan. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 19 Click OK. click the Annotation Objects tab. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags.Filled. Section Tail . clear any others. and click OK.

26 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 6 mm. and click OK. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. open Metric\Families\Annotations. 36 In the drawing. 27 Click OK twice. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. For Corner Radius. Click OK. and click OK. click Load into Project. For Line Weight. and on the Options Bar. For Dimensions ➤ Width. 40 Press ESC. select the callout. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head.5mm Square. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 12. . select the current project. Click OK. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 39 Click OK twice. On the floor plan. and click Open.5 mm. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Callout Tag. 30 On the Design Bar.rfa. . select Square. select Custom-Callout Head. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. notice the square elevation markers that display. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. select 3. 34 In the Name dialog. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open.23 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. select 12. for Elevation Tag. click Edit/New. and on the Options Bar. click Edit/New. clear all others. click Training Files.

49 Click OK. You learn to create view templates.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 43 Under Category. filters. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. masking regions. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . and visual overrides. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. view regions. and select 4. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. select Dash. scroll down to Callout Boundary. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. and select 7. expand Callout Boundary. click the Annotation Objects tab. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 46 Under Category. 45 For Line Pattern.

To accomplish this. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. under Elevations. 2 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. The crop region displays as red. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. and double-click East.Creating a View Template In this exercise. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. 5 On the View Control Bar.rvt. 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. click Zoom to Fit. click Training Files. and apply it to multiple elevation views. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click (Show Crop Region). Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the View Toolbar.

Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. grids. clear Entourage. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. levels. 13 On the View Control bar. 11 Under Visibility. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. elevation markers. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. and section lines are now hidden in the view. under Visibility. Creating a View Template | 177 . click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. Callouts. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

right-click North. double-click North. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Apply View Template. 18 In the Project Browser. right-click East. 20 Using the same method. under Elevations. edit the crop region as before. and click Create View Template From View. 15 In the New View Template dialog. click Apply.rvt. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click OK. 16 In the View Templates dialog. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. and click OK.14 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 17 In the Project Browser. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and click OK. 19 In the Select View Template dialog.

3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. under Extents. for Bottom. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. for View Range. under Floor Plans. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views.rvt.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. select Level Below (Level 4). View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. select Penthouse. right-click. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. double-click Penthouse. select Level Below (Level 4). for Level. Under View Depth. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. and click Properties. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. Click OK twice. 2 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.

select Roof Plan. 6 In the Project Browser. for View Range. Click OK twice. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click Roof Plan. right-click. and click Properties. select Level 4. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. under Floor Plans.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. click Edit. select Level 4. Under View Depth. for Level. for Bottom.

and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. click Plan Region. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . click Edit. for View Range. Move you cursor diagonally. click Lines. Under View Depth. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. select Unlimited.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Unlimited. under Extents. Click OK twice. 10 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. for Level. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). In the left corner of the building. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. click Region Properties. 11 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for Bottom. 16 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar.

18 Click File menu ➤ Save. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. click the Filters tab. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. and double-click Level 1. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. in this case. 1 In the Project Browser. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . After you apply the filter. under Views (all). expand Floor Plans. click Modify. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. the fire rating of the walls.rvt.17 On the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.

18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and click OK.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. enter Rated Walls. click Edit/New. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . for Pattern. 5 In the Filters dialog. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 14 In the Color dialog. select Walls. click (New). apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. under Basic colors. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. 10 On the Filter tab. for Color. select Solid Fill. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. 7 In the Filters dialog. and apply a color. Enter Hr. 16 Click OK. select Fire Rating. and click OK. 12 On the Filter tab. under Projection/Surface. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. 9 Click OK. click OK. click <No Override>. and click OK. under Filters. under Categories. click Add. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. and click OK. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. for Rated Walls. click Remove. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. click Override under Patterns. 17 Using the same method. Select contains. 11 Select Rated Walls. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. select the red color.

you obscure geometry in portions of a view. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. To accomplish this.20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

right-click. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Invisible lines. 5 On the View menu. under Floor Plans. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. 11 In the Type Selector. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 1 In the Project Browser. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . click Masking Region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. and click Rename. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. 8 Select the crop region. 9 On the View Control Bar. as shown. click Show Crop Region. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. and click OK. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 4 On the View Control Bar. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1.rvt.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 7 On the View menu.

14 On the Design Bar. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. click Finish Sketch. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click (Rectangle). 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.12 On the Options Bar.

Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . right-click. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. 7 Under Cut. click <No Override> to apply a color. and click OK. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. and click Override. right-click Unit 18 Plan .rvt. under Pattern Overrides. right-click. 11 Click OK twice. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. under Visibility. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. for Pattern. for Color. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click in the Patterns field. click black. select Walls. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.Level 1. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select Solid fill. and click 1: 50. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click Rename. and click OK.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. 1 In the Project Browser. click the current scale. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 4 On the View Control Bar. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1.

under Visibility. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. and click OK. clear Grids. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. 16 Under Visibility. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Floors. click Modify.

18 Right-click. Working with Visual Overrides | 189 . and click Hide in View ➤ Category. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.

the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. select the sofa. for Pattern. click <No Override> to apply a color. for Color. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. under Lines. select Dash. By using the previous method to make the selection. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. 23 In the Color dialog. 21 Under Projection/Surface.20 Right-click. click Projection Lines. click Override. and click OK. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. right-click. 25 Click OK twice. click a purple color.

right-click. click . click By Category Override. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . 32 Select one of the lamps. 30 On the Design Bar. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. and click OK twice. click Modify.28 For Color. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. 29 In the Color dialog. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. select a bright green color.

you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .33 On the View Control Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. how to add views to the sheets. click .

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Sheet.Creating Sheets. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. right-click. select A0 metric. and click View. click Training Files. and click OK. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar.rvt. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats.

The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . For Sheet Name. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. enter Site Plan. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 On the Design Bar. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. expand Sheets (all). on the Options Bar.Unnamed. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. Click OK. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. click Modify. click Modify. 3 In the Project Browser. 5 When the title block highlights.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. For Sheet Number. enter A101. and select the title block.

MA 12345 12 Click OK. For Project Number. 2009. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. for Project Address. 14 Click OK. enter J. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . enter Freighthouse Flats. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. For Project Status. The new project information displays in the titleblock. Smith. enter 2009-1. under Other. For Project Name. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. click Edit. enter 15 May. enter For Approval. For Client Name.

Sections A108 .Layout Plan A104 . 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. and click Save.Elevations A107 . Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. for Name. and click Rename.Elevations A105 . Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. and click OK. you add views to these sheets. right-click. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise.Stairs In the following exercise. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . 17 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog.Elevations A106 . enter Floor Plan. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select the new sheet name. 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select A0 metric.rvt.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser.

The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. 6 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. under Floor Plans.Floor Plan. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . under Sheets (all). drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. click Modify.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click to place the view. select Level 1. The red border around the view no longer displays. double-click A102 . Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet.rvt. double-click A104 .Elevations. and drag it to the sheet. under Sheets (all). Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place it. and click to place it. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail).7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. double-click A107 . and click to place it. 12 On the Design Bar. align it with the East elevation.Sections. click Modify. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all).

. select 1:5. move the cursor over it. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. and click OK. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . and press TAB until it highlights. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. for View Scale. and on the Options Bar.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. zoom in to the grip. 16 Select title bar.

21 Zoom to the stair callout. 19 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save.Stairs. 18 Under Floor Plans. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. under Sheets (all). 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place it. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. click Modify. double-click Level 1.Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. double-click A108 . and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers.

and click Activate View. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. and press ENTER. under Sheets (all). click Modify.rvt.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. enter 16700 mm. 2 Select the building section view. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. right-click. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. double-click A107 . Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. In order to do this.Sections. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. you must first activate the view on the sheet. 5 On the Design Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. and then make changes and deactivate the view.

8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 7 In the Project Browser.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.6 Right-click. double-click North. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. You modify the view to hide the view title. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. and click Deactivate View. After you create the sheet. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise.

select A0 metric. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. double-click Level 1. and click Properties. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. enter T.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser. The camera view displays. enter Title Sheet. For Sheet Name. 7 Place the camera as shown. click Camera. Click OK. under Floor Plans. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . right-click. select the new sheet name.

click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 12 On the View Control Bar. enter 18000 mm. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. For Far Clip Offset. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 13 In the Project Browser. select Far Clip Active. For Target Elevation.Title Sheet. 14 Under 3D Views. enter 100000 mm. under Sheets (all). Under Camera. enter 1500 mm. and click to place it in the center of the sheet.8 On the Options Bar. 11 On the View Control Bar. Under Extents. for Eye Elevation. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. double-click T . Click OK. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

select No. and then click OK. . 23 In the Type Properties dialog. 25 On the Design Bar. for Show title. under Graphics. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. select Scale (locked proportions). click Size. Click Apply. click Modify. for Height. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet.15 With the view selected. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . click Modify. click Duplicate. and click OK. 22 In the Name dialog. Under Model Crop Size. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. enter Viewport/no title mark. and on the Options Bar. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 24 Click OK twice. 19 Select the view on the sheet. enter 635 mm.

and close the exercise file.26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

You also learn to create different types of schedules. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. expand Floor Plans. such as doors and windows. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. such as room and window schedules. Tagging Objects In this lesson. click Training Files.Level 1. Because of the open style floor plan. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans.rvt.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 207 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture.

as shown: 5 Using the same method. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing).2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. click Room Separation. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click Room and Area. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. right-click in the Design Bar. move the cursor to the right. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms.

click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. click Load. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 9 In the Tags dialog.6 Using the same method. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area.

13 On the Options Bar.rfa. and click to place the room and tag. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Training Files. 14 For Offset. 11 In the Tags dialog. and the rectangle contains the room tag. 16 On the Design Bar. The room tag number displays in blue.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Room. type 2400 mm. indicating that it can be edited. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. click OK. click Modify. verify that Tag on placement is selected. click it. and select the room tag. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. and press ENTER. type U18-1. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged.

click Room. type Entry. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. Click to place the new room and tag. and press ENTER. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. 23 Using the same method. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. type Kitchen. Sequential letters are also supported. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. click Modify. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 22 Click the room text label. place rooms and tags. and press ENTER.18 Click the room text label. Dining. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 .

Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Room Separation. under Floor Plans. click Room Tag. The rooms are already placed. 27 On the Design Bar. double-click Unit 18 Plan . expand Lines. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair).Level 2. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Modify. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. on the Model Categories tab. 29 On the Design Bar. but they need to be tagged. and moving clockwise.

in the Project Browser. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. click Tag ➤ By Category. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you learn how to place door and window tags. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. clear Leader. 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.Level 1.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . and double-click Unit 18 Plan . expand Floor Plans.rvt. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

add 5 more rooms. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. type Corridor. type Building Entry. next to Rows. select Corridor. 10 Edit the number to be 101. type Storage. and press ENTER. For 103. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . and press ENTER. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. For 104. and press ENTER. click New. select Storage. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. The room Number is U17-46. for Name. For 102. 101-106. for room 101.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. 11 Using the same method. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. For 105.

For Weight.rvt. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. click Override. double-click Level 1. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Floor Plans. type Stair. In the Line Graphics dialog. click the bright green swatch. click the Color field. place rooms from a program list. and modify room names. For Room Separation. 4 Click OK twice. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select 9. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. In the Lines field. click the Lines field. and press ENTER. and click OK. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. under Visibility. expand Lines. 13 Save the file. Under Custom colors. you add room separation lines. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.■ For 106. under Projection/Surface. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.

click Modify.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. 9 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. draw the horizontal line. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. click Room. click Room Separation. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . First. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar.

select 101 Building Entry. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). 14 For Offset. for Room. for Room. 11 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. type 2400 mm.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. select 102 Storage.

double-click Room Schedule. place the following rooms. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). 20 While pressing CTRL. 19 In the Project Browser. and zoom in to the Corridor. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . under Schedules/Quantities. under Floor Plans. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). 17 On the Design Bar. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 16 Using the same method. double-click Level 1.

Floor Finish. type As Selected. select Base Finish. click Schedule/Quantities. type Units. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 24 Open the Room Schedule. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. select Rooms. click New. (Element Properties). while pressing CTRL. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule.21 On the Options Bar. 31 For Key Name. and click OK. and click Add. click 23 On the Design Bar. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. under Category. under Available fields. for Rows. click Modify. 30 On the Options Bar. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. clear Room Bounding. and Wall Finish. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. and for all 3 finishes. under Constraints. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 27 Select Schedule keys.

and click OK. and click Properties. select Room Style. select Rooms. 43 In the Filter dialog. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. under Other. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. select Units. 37 Open the Room Schedule. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. 42 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Edit. right-click Room Schedule. click Check None. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. under Schedules/Quantities.32 Using the same method. click (Element Properties). 38 Under U17-8. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 33 In the Project Browser. click (Filter Selection). 36 Click OK twice. select Units. for Room Style. under Floor Plans. under Identity Data. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. and click Add. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 44 On the Options Bar. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. for Fields. for Available fields. for Room Style. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . double-click Level 1.

and 106.46 Open the Room Schedule. for Name. under Views (all). 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Graphics. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. 9 In the Project Browser. click OK. (Duplicate). select Public. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 48 Save the file. select Service. under Floor Plans. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click Properties. right-click Level 1. and apply it to the Level 1 view. at the warning prompt. select Room Style. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. 104. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Color. and double-click Level 1. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. type Room Type. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. type Room Type. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. click 5 For Title. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 103. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. For rooms 102 and 105. click the Color Scheme field.rvt. click OK.

for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. click Modify. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and clear Room Separation. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). 17 On the Design Bar. select Room Type. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 .11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. 14 Click OK twice. expand Lines. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. select the color legend. under Schemes. clear Visible. click the value in the Color column. click Edit Color Scheme. under Visibility. click Color Scheme Legend. 19 On the Options Bar. click Edit. When you move the cursor over the drawing area.

27 In the Type Properties dialog. for Size. and click OK. 29 Click OK twice. 24 Click OK. respectively. under Graphics. click Modify. 23 Using the same method. type 25 mm. 30 On the Design Bar. (Element Properties). change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. select blue. under Custom color. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. click Edit/New.22 In the Color dialog. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . on the Options Bar. type 5 mm. for Swatch Width. 28 Under Title Text.

under Sections. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. click Color Scheme Legend. select Rooms. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. select Room Type. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. right-click Building Section. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 35 Click OK twice. under Graphics. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. double-click Building Section. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. and click OK. for Color Scheme. under Sections. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. under Visibility. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . click Edit. and select Properties.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser.

41 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. and click OK. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Room Style. under Identity Data. select all the rooms in the stairwell. select Units. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. (Filter Selection). and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). for Room Style. click Check None. select Rooms. click . under Identity Data. select Public.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 In the Filter dialog. 46 Click .

and click OK. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. 51 On the Options Bar. 54 While pressing CTRL. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . click New. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. for Room Style. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. type Suites. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Room Style Schedule. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. select Service. and click . for Rows. under Identity Data. excluding the stairwell spaces.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. under Key Name for the new row.

and click OK. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .55 Click . The color fill will extend to the roof. The color fill extends to the roof. verify that At wall finish is selected. under Identity Data. under Volume Computations. and click OK. select the room on the left side of the top floor. 59 Under Room Area Computation. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. for Room Style. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. select Suites. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. select Areas and Volumes. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. but not beyond it.

66 Click OK. 70 For Limit Offset. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). type -254 mm. under Constraints. under Constraints. select the stairwell room. select Loft. and click 65 For Limit Offset.0.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. 67 On the first level. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. 71 Click OK. click Modify. the dining room. select Level 2. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . and the living room. for Upper Limit. type 0. 68 Click . for Upper Limit. . 72 On the Design Bar.

You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. under 3D Views. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser.73 Save the file. double-click {3D}. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building.

and click Add. click Family and Type. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 3 While pressing CTRL. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. 9 Using the same method. 5 On the Design Bar. under Available fields. select Roofs. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . under Category. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. 4 In the Type Selector. select Family and Type.EPDM.Insulation on Plywood Deck . Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 . Clear Itemize every instance. Select Grand totals. click Modify. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. select Material: Description. and click OK. For Then by. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff.

for Fields. select Material: Area. click Estimated Cost. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Formatting tab. 17 Click Calculated Value. and under Fields. and click Properties. select Currency. type Estimated Cost. 23 For Field formatting. 12 Click OK.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 20 For Formula. and click Add. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. select Calculate totals. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. 19 For Type. for Name. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. under Available fields. select Material: Cost. 21 Click OK. select Calculate totals. Under Field formatting. and click OK twice. click Edit. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog.40 50. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. under Other. for Material: Cost.

28 For Unit symbol. 31 Save the file. you create an exiting plan for the building. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . select $. creating a generic tag to tag the family. These shared parameters can be added to any family. you create a shared parameter file. either within family components or within the project template. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. 30 Click OK twice. adding the shared parameters to a family. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. Digit grouping. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. 29 Select Use digit grouping. ensuring consistency across families and projects. regardless of category. and reporting the shared parameters. 27 In the Format dialog.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. and are defined and stored in an external file. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. for Currency. tag the line. In this lesson. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. for Rounding. which inserts commas after every three digits. 26 In the Project Units dialog. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. can be used for any number-based parameter. and schedule the total distance of each path. The cost fields are formatted correctly. click the Format value. not just for currency. You draw a travel path line.

under Groups. and click Save. click Training Files. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Name. click Create. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. under Floor Plans. type Path ID. 1 In the Project Browser. type OfficeStandardsParameters. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 9 Under Parameters. for File name. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. for Name. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click New. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. and click OK. type Travel Distance.txt. and click OK. for Type of Parameter. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog.rvt. select Length.rvt. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 7 Under Parameters. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. click New. type Exiting. 11 Click OK twice. for Name. click New. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog.

7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Load into Projects. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 4 In the Family Types dialog. Click Training Files. click Family Types. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. 3 On the Design Bar. under Parameter Type. click Add.rfa. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . 8 Select Instance. under Parameters. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. 14 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select Shared parameter. click Add. under Parameters. type Length. under Dimensions. for Travel Distance Formula. If you have multiple projects open.rvt. select Constraints. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. following the equals symbol (=). 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 11 Click OK. in the Load into Projects dialog. otherwise the family loads into the current project. and select Instance. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 15 If necessary. 10 Using the same method. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click OK. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected.rvt. group it under Dimensions. for Group parameter under. 9 In the Family Types dialog. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 12 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. under Parameter Data. and click Select. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. 13 Click Apply. and click OK.

17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. under Parameters. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click parameter(s) to label). click Label. select Travel Distance.rft. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. click (Add Parameter). click Training Files. click Select. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. select Travel Distance. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 24 Click OK twice. click Label. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. under Category Parameters. and click OK. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes.

for File Name. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 . 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window.rvt is selected. and click Save.rfa. 29 In the drawing window.28 On the Design Bar. select Path ID. type M_Travel Distance Tag. and move it down. click Modify. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. and click OK. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. 35 Save the file. 33 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Save As dialog. and press DELETE. click Load into Projects.

2 Zoom in to the corridor. and click in the center of the corridor.rvt. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID.Level 1. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. double-click Exiting Plan . 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 4 On the Options Bar. select Chain. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. under Floor Plans.Tagging. click Component. above the exterior door as shown.Placing. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. 6 Move the cursor to the right. After the lines are tagged. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID.

7 Move the cursor down. move the cursor near the right corner. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. double click Exiting Plan . 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Constraints. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. and click (Element Properties). 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify that Chain is selected. select the 2 dashed travel lines.Tagging. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Tag ➤ By Category. and click outside of the building. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . 13 While pressing CTRL. Placing. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Component. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. through the door. clear Leader. under Floor Plans. type 1-1. 8 On the Design Bar. for Path ID. 17 On the Options Bar.Level 2. click Modify.

256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .19 Move the cursor up through the door. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. move the cursor to the left. click Component. and click. 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 23 Move the cursor down. 20 On the Design Bar. and click in the stair. and click above the door to the stair.

. Placing. 27 On the Design Bar. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. for Path ID. and click OK. type 2-1. click Modify. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. under Constraints. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. 28 While pressing CTRL. 33 For Name.24 On the Design Bar. and click OK. type Level 1 Exit Distance. under Category. 30 Using the same method. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected.Tagging. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. under Other. type 1-. and click OK. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. and under Field formatting. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. 50 Save the file. in the third field. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. select Path ID and Travel Distance. for Filter. under Available fields. while pressing CTRL. and in the third field. under Schedules/Quantities. click Training Files. select Travel Distance. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. 49 Click OK twice. 43 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 38 For Sort by. select Calculate totals. for Filter by. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. select Path ID. and click Properties. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 44 In the Project Browser. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. type 2-. select contains. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 45 In the Rename View dialog. in the first field. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Add. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 41 Under Fields. 36 For Filter by. 46 In the Project Browser. 40 Click the Formatting tab. 35 Click the Filter tab. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. in the second field. 42 Click OK. select Path ID. click Edit. and click Rename. type Level 2 Exit Distance.

Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. click the Fields tab. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. 4 Under Available fields.Fixed Partitions. for Assembly Code. and click Properties. under Identity Data. expand C . and click View. right-click Generic .Partitions ➤ C1010100 . 10 In the schedule. and click OK. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. under Categories. 2 In the New Schedule dialog.Partitions . 9 Click OK twice. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 .Interiors ➤ C10 . expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 . select the following fields.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. select Walls. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and select C1010145 . click the Value field. click Schedule/Quantities.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click . right-click the Design Bar.152 mm.

3 Click New. type Revit_Project. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. the database display may be different than that shown. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. under Database. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. for Database Name. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise.rvt. and click Next.mdb. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the File Data Source tab. click Training Files. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database.11 Close the exercise file. and click OK to create the database. 11 Click OK 3 times. 9 Under Directories. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 1 On the File menu. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. and click Next. click Create. select a location for the database file. 8 In the New Database dialog. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. click OK. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 6 Click Finish. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source.mdb). and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format.

which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. Additionally. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. 13 Close the exercise file. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. For example. in addition to the Id column. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables.

262 .

as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. 263 . Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

297 . For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. add detail components. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. like a standard door header condition. In order to detail from the building model. you trace over the building model geometry. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. In the callout view. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. plywood. These components display at the required scale. and metal studs. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson.

Detailing the View In this exercise. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. After you add components. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Detail Component. select As underlay. Exact location is not important. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. as well as detail lines.rfa.rvt. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you detail the view of the roof edge. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. region objects. They are also view specific. The roof overhang detail displays. You load detail components. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. which means that all detail components. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click Open. 5 In the alert dialog. 7 In the drawing area. and insulation objects. double-click the detail callout head. and click OK. click Training Files. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.

Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. click (Element Properties). enter 406. click Duplicate. 17 In the drawing area. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. enter Corrugated Metal Siding.8 Delete the component. 15 For Spacing. 10 On the Options Bar. Detailing the View | 299 . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. click Modify. click Repeating Detail. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. and click OK. click Edit/New. 16 Click OK twice.5mm. 19 On the Design Bar. select Corrugated Metal. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. 13 In the Name dialog. for Pattern ➤ Detail.

24 In the Type Selector. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. ■ ■ Click Modify. click (Move).20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 22 On the Options Bar. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. click Training Files. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Load. click Detail Component. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. and on the Edit toolbar.rfa. and click Open.

32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point.Because you still have several components to load. 29 On the Design Bar. and place it in the detail view as shown. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. you load them as a group from a single file. click Detail Component. press SPACEBAR 3 times. click OK. 31 To properly orient the component. Detailing the View | 301 . and click Open. click Training Files. 30 In the Type Selector. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. 33 In the Type Selector.rvt. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog.

Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. click the Flip instance arrows. 38 Select the horizontal segment. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. 35 On the Options Bar. select Chain. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. 37 Click Modify. and click Modify.

and on the Edit toolbar. click (Move).Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. click Detail Component. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. Detailing the View | 303 . as shown. click Insulation. For Offset. ■ Click Modify. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. 42 Click Modify. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. select to near side. enter 140mm.

rvt. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. Adding Detail Lines on page 304. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Like detail components. they are view specific.45 In the Type Selector. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. 47 In the Type Selector. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. select Thin Lines. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. meaning they display only in this view. click Detail Lines. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 51 Click Modify. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. as shown. you add lines to your detail. 2 In the Type Selector. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. and lock the component.

enter 10mm. and press ENTER. select Medium Lines. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).4 Click Modify. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. For Offset. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. 11 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. For Offset. select Thin Lines. as shown. 10 On the Design Bar. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . click Detail Lines. as shown. enter 10mm. 5 Select the vertical plywood component.

16 On the Options Bar. click (Draw).Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. as shown. select Chain. and clear Chain. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. and draw the detail lines as shown.

24 On the View Control Bar. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. draw the detail lines as shown. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Click (Pick Lines). and click Properties. When you turn the display model off. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. enter 10mm. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. 22 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Type Selector. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . click Detail Lines. select Thin Lines. right-click.18 In the Type Selector. select Vapor Barrier. select Do not display. select the Penthouse level line. For Offset. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. and press ENTER.

you add text notes to complete the detail. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. press SPACEBAR as necessary. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. click Detail Component. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. select M_Break Line. 32 Click Modify.29 On the Design Bar. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 30 In the Type Selector. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. Adding Text Notes on page 308. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask.

Enter the text. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. 2 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. click Text. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. and click to place the dimension. Click again to specify the location of the text box. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click Modify. Adding Text Notes | 309 . 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar.rvt. click Dimension.

right-click.. click 6 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click the dimension text. and press DELETE.Keynotes. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. on the Options Bar. select a text note. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. for Suffix. click Roof Overhang Detail.7 Select the dimension line. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. (Filter Selection). m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. and click OK. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. click Select All Instances.rvt. under Text Fields. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). enter Roof Overhang Detail . 10 Proceed to the next exercise. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. right-click. Creating Detail Components on page 310. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. right-click. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. and click Rename. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. and save the exercise file. and click OK. enter Typ.

and selecting the chain. pressing TAB. Creating Detail Components | 311 . in the Type Selector. and click Open. 16 Click Modify. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. click Training Files. while pressing CTRL. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 15 Use a window to select all linework. select Medium Lines. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 14 Click Modify. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.7 Click Modify.rft. select all the coping linework.

navigate to your preferred location. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. 28 On the Options Bar. 30 In the drawing area. and click Open. 24 On the Options Bar. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. enter Roof Edge. 22 Click Modify. 25 In the Filter dialog. click Training Files. click . and the component can be placed in the detail. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 21 To place the component. click Load. click Load into Projects.18 In the Save As dialog. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. While pressing SHIFT.rfa. The original linework remains selected. and click OK. click Detail Component. delete the underlying linework.Keynotes view is not the open view. clear Detail Items. and click Save. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 23 Using a window. select the coping. click Detail Component. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. 31 Using the same method used previously. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . 26 Press DELETE. 27 On the Design Bar. you place keynotes on objects. Adding Keynotes on page 312. for File name. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. double-click it in the Project Browser. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping.

5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking.rfa. For the metal coping. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. select the metal fascia with drip edge. and click Open. click Training Files. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area.rvt. and click OK. use keynote 07645. 6 Click Modify. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. click Edit/New. Click to place the leader arm. 19mm Plywood. 63mm Rigid Insulation. (Element Properties).B5. Adding Keynotes | 313 . In the Keynotes dialog. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. use keynote 06160.D11. 2 In the alert dialog. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. Roof Edge4.C1. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Keynote ➤ Element.

use keynote 06110. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. FasciaProfile_1. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.G1. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. click Keynote ➤ Element. 18 Save the file. use keynote 06110. For the 50 x 200. 15 In the Type Selector. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them.20 Ga. For the 50 x 150.9 In the Type Properties dialog. select Corrugated Metal. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. click in the Value column. 22mm Corrugated Steel . Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. using keynote 07460. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge.F1. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. and click . For the 19mm Plywood Siding. You do this in order to keynote the component. click Detail Component. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. navigate to 07645.I1. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 17 Keynote the component. use keynote 06160. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties.D1.D11. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. For the 50 x 300. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. use keynote 09250. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK 3 times.A8. use keynote 06110. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing .F1.

and click Save. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. select Medium Line Detail Component. click Load into Projects. 13 In the Type Selector. 19 In the Name dialog. click Detail Component. for File name. 24 While pressing CTRL. 6 Lock the line. click Lines. select the left end point of the reference line. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. and select the right end point. 9 On the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties). select Medium Lines. 8 In the Save As dialog. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. click Duplicate. 20 Click OK 3 times. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar.rft. and click Modify. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Open. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. 4 In the Type Selector. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. click Detail Component. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. navigate to your preferred location. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. and click Open. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 .rvt. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 16 Select the component. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. click Load. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Edit/New. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Training Files. 15 Click Modify. 22 On the Options Bar. 5 In the drawing area. and m_Light Line Detail Component. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 11 Press DELETE. 17 In the Element Properties dialog.

37 Click OK 3 times. 40 Click Modify. and click . for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 34 In the Name dialog. 44 On the Design Bar. 38 On the Design Bar. and click the lower end at the break line. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 46 Click Modify. against the 19mm plywood.A5. on the Edit toolbar. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. 41 Select the component just added. click Duplicate.A1. and click . 47 Select the component. 28 In the Type Selector. 29 In the drawing area. click Detail Component. name the component Air Barrier.25 Next. click Detail Component. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. click in the Value column. and assign it keynote 07260. 30 Click Modify. and click OK. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. click Detail Component. 27 On the Design Bar. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. name the component 50 x 200 Framing.G1. and click . 35 In the Type Properties dialog. and assign it keynote 06110. click (Move). invisible. and hidden) used in the view. and click . 49 With the component selected. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. select m_Light Line Detail Component. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. You add the components to the project and keynote them. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 48 Using the same method used previously. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. enter EPDM Membrane. click Edit/New. 31 Select the component. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 42 Using the same method used previously. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 33 In the Type Properties dialog.

56 Delete both dashed detail lines. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 55 Click Modify. 53 On the Options Bar. and click .Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 . 52 In the Type Selector. select Chain. leaving the detail component lines.

draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 60 On the Design Bar. Air Barrier. 61 In the drawing area. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. and Vapor Barrier. click Keynote ➤ Element. click Detail Component. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . name the component Vapor Barrier. select the component.rfa.A4. 50 x 200 Framing. click Load into Projects. 68 In the drawing area. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.58 Using the method used previously. select Invisible Lines. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. 67 In the Type Selector. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. and assign it keynote 07260. in the Type Selector.rfa. 63 In the drawing area. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component.

rvt. name the component Batt Insul. and click .txt. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. and press TAB. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. The database file opens in a text editor.A4. and press ENTER. Enter 07463. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . click File menu ➤ Save. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.. 3 In the text editor. click Browse. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Enter 07460. add a keynote for the component.A1. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. and press TAB. and assign it keynote 07210.69 Select the component. 70 Using the method used previously. 71 In the drawing area. and close the text editor. under Keynote Table. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing.A9. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. 72 Save the file.

select all the keynotes. In the Type Selector. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. Each keynote displays as a simple number. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang).txt. and click to place the note. you learn how to create a drafted detail. 9 In the drawing area.A1. 14 Save the file. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. select Absolute. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. 11 Click Modify. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. These details do not update with changes to the building model. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. and click Open. and click OK. navigate to 07463. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. under Path Type. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. click to place the leader. and click OK. click Keynote ➤ Element. After you create a drafting view. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 13 Click Modify.

Click Open. The detail is imported as an import symbol. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. click Training Files. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Black and White. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported.dwg. and click OK. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . verify that Auto . 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 6 In the Project Browser. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. and click Rename. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. For Positioning. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. The detail that you import is in DWG format. 8 Proceed to the next exercise.Center to Center is selected. 7 In the Rename View dialog.rvt.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. right-click Drafting 1. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. select 1 : 5. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt. for Scale. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. For Colors. enter EPDM Metal Coping.

11 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the callout. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). delete the existing value.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Rename. select Reference other view. enter Detail . for New. 5 Click Modify. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click EPDM Metal Coping.No Reference. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. and click Properties. click Edit/New. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. 10 In the Rename dialog. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. 12 Click OK twice. 3 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Callout. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping.

and double-click the callout./Sect. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. click Modify. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. The callout is updated with the sheet information./Det. double-click A105 . under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 . 19 Proceed to the next exercise.Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail.No Reference). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product.Elev. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. 18 Save the file. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail.

click Region Properties. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 14 Click OK 3 times. click Detail Component. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. click Edit/New. enter Gyp. select Gypsum-Plaster.rvt. 11 In the Name dialog. 5 In the Type Selector. enter Header @ Sliding Door. for Name. 3 On the View Control Bar. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Filled Region. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. Board. and click OK. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. . and click OK. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. for Name.

Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. 18 While pressing CTRL. click 22 On the Options Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . and enter 20.5mm. click (Draw). (Mirror). 16 Select the left edge of the region. select the left and bottom edges of the region. click . 17 Click Modify. and on the Edit toolbar. Draw a rectangle as shown. select Wide Lines. Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. select the width dimension. 19 In the Type Selector. click Finish Sketch.

. 30 In the Name dialog. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. click Duplicate. select Wood . 33 Click OK 3 times. and click OK. and click above the top of the region as the end point. 24 Select the mirrored region. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. click Filled Region. Move the cursor up. 29 In the Type Properties dialog.Finish. click Edit/New. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. for Name.Finish. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Region Properties. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter Wood . 25 Click Modify. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . in the Type Selector. verify that the thickness is 19mm. click . and select the right edge of the wood region. click Finish Sketch. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. 39 In the Type Selector. select Medium Lines.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. sketch the new region as shown. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. 38 On the Design Bar. Draw a rectangle as shown. select Medium Lines. click (Align). 40 On the Options Bar. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. 37 On the Design Bar. click (Rectangle).5mm. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region.

You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. click 48 Click Modify. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. click Finish Sketch. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 47 Click the reference plane. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. and press ENTER. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it.42 On the Design Bar. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Filled Region. For Offset. enter 6mm. click Ref Plane. enter 10mm. (Align). 46 On the Tools toolbar. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. For Offset. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).

For Offset.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). and click to select the point. and click to select the point. Move the cursor down 305mm. Select Chain. click (Trim/Extend). 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. 56 On the Design Bar. 54 On the Tools toolbar. and click to select the point. and press ENTER. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. enter 0. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . Move the cursor right 25mm. and select the bottom horizontal line. click Finish Sketch. Move the cursor left 25mm.

and click Open.rfa. select the height dimension.2mm. enter 3mm. top. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. click Training Files. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. For Offset. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. 68 Click Modify. click Detail Component. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Load. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing .Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. 60 Select the left. 69 Select the bolt. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 62 Select the left detail line. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. 65 On the Options Bar. and right edges of the door panel region. and press ENTER. enter 76. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 61 Click Modify. 58 In the Type Selector.

click Detail Component.rfa. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. select Wide Lines. click Detail Lines. click Training Files. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . 71 On the Options Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. click Load. and click Open. 76 In the Type Selector. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. 74 Select the expansion bolt. use the images as a guide.70 On the Design Bar.

(Mirror). click . 85 On the Options Bar. select Thin Lines. and on the Edit toolbar. 84 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. 82 Select the rectangle. 79 In the Type Selector. click . click Detail Lines. 87 Click Modify. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 80 On the Options Bar.78 On the Design Bar. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown.

91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. 90 In the Type Selector. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. click Detail Lines. and on the Edit toolbar.88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. select Medium Lines. 89 On the Design Bar. as shown. 92 Select the line. click (Mirror).

97 On the Options Bar. click Detail Component. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 95 On the Design Bar. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. select M_Break Line. enter 3mm. 103 Add two break lines as shown. 99 Click Modify. and press ENTER. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. select the length dimension. click Detail Lines. 101 On the Design Bar. and click to place the arc as shown. 102 In the Type Selector. click . 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line.

select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. using the Drag Text grip. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. 108 In the Type Selector.5mm Arial. 107 On the Design Bar. and click Modify.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. and click Modify. click Dimension. drag the text for the smaller dimension. 105 In the drawing area. 110 Select the dimension line. click Dimension. 106 Click to place the dimension.

and click the dimension text. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. for Below. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. 113 Under Text Fields. click Dimension.2. 114 Click OK. and enter Varies. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . and then click the dimension text. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog. enter See Schedule. select Replace With Text. select Replace With Text. 118 Select Modify to end the command.5mmArial. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . under Dimension Value.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. under Dimension Value.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 .121 Click OK. 127 Enter Gyp. and click Modify. 126 In the drawing area. click (Add Right Arc Leader). click to create an arced leader. click Text. Board. 128 Select the note. 125 In the Options Bar. select the gypsum board region on the left. Enter 225 mm @ Type C. and on the Options Bar. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. 123 Click OK. 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. and click to place the text.

338 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 132 Save the file. click Modify to end the command.131 On the Design Bar.

339 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text.rvt. and double-click East.

4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Select the keynote. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag.Hexagon.rfa. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. for Number of Leaders. click Symbol. type 1. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 7 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . click Modify. 5 On the Options Bar.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. under Identity Data. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Note Block | 341 . 12 On the Edit toolbar. type Seal existing doors and insulate. click (Copy). click (Element Properties). on the Options Bar. and click OK. for Text. 13 Select the tag. and click above the tag to place the copy.

make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. 17 Click OK.14 With the copy selected. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. and click. 19 With the tag selected. 15 For Text. 18 Using the same method. click Copy. click (Element Properties). on the Edit toolbar. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . type Repair existing door surround. and on the Options Bar. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. on the Options Bar. type B. 16 For Tag. (Mirror).

Repair existing door surround. Remove all existing windows. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . Clean exterior brick wall. using the table as a reference. and moving counter-clockwise. Repair as required. 22 Optionally. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Tuckpoint as required. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. click Modify. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate.21 On the Design Bar. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Clean existing concrete loading dock.

expand Sheets (all).Elevations. for the value. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. expand Schedules/Quantities. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. On the Formatting tab. 27 In the column header (text). type 6 mm. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. On the Appearance tab. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and for Alignment. and click Add. for Heading. type Description. under Available fields.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. type Mark. select Tag. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. for Header text. Create. and double-click A103 . 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. format. for Note block name. for Sort by. 26 Click OK. select Exterior Construction Notes. and drag it to the sheet. and click Add. select Tag. and click OK. Clean cut and repair wall as required. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. and select Bold. 29 In the Project Browser. Select Text. verify that Arial is selected. select Center. 28 In the Project Browser. type Exterior Construction Notes. 24 In the New Note Block dialog.

33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. double-click T . 32 Zoom in to see the note block. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser.31 On the Design Bar.rvt. Using Drawing Lists | 345 . you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. under Sheets (all). Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise.Title Sheet. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson.rvt. click Modify.

under Sheets (all). 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. in the second field. Select Sheet Name.Title Sheet. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. expand Schedules/Quantities. in the first field. select Sheet Number. and click Add. The drawing list displays. for Filter by. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. On the Filter tab. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. select Sheet Index. and in the third field. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and drag it to the sheet. double-click T . under Available fields. 7 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. for Sort by. select does not equal. and click Add. select Sheet Number. 5 In the list title field. type T. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. select Sheet Number. ■ 4 Click OK.

Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. 11 Save the file. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. Training File Using Legends | 347 . For the text. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. door frame schedule. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. doors.9 On the Design Bar. and door frames. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. On construction documents. click Modify. Finally. On construction documents. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. windows. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. and so on). you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it.

Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. click Symbol.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . click Edit/New. 9 For Text Font. for Name. for Name. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Duplicate. type Legend Text. and click OK twice. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Text. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. 10 For Text Size. select Arial. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. and click OK.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. type Typical Symbol Legend.Open Level Head . Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. you create a text type with the necessary size. type 3mm.rvt.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. click . Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. 6 On the Options Bar.

Site Plan/Floor Plan. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. expand Legends. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. click Typical Symbol Legend. and for Leader. expand Sheets (all). verify that is selected. 14 Working from the top down.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. and click to place it. 16 In the Project Browser. and double-click A101 . Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 . verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point.

Unit 18. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. 18 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. 19 In the Project Browser. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. click Modify. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet.17 In the Type Selector. double-click A102 . select Viewport : No Titlemark. click Modify. 21 In the Type Selector. 22 On the Design Bar. under Sheets. 23 Save the file. select Viewport : No Titlemark.

8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. select 1 : 50. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall.rvt. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. type 4th Floor Wall Types. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. select Medium for Detail Level. 3 For Scale. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. for Name. For View. type 900 mm. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. select Section. and click OK. click Legend Component. 5 On the View Control Bar. For Host length. and press ENTER.

for Family. for Leader. 12 In the Type Selector. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 10 Select the second wall. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.9 On the Design Bar. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. click to add text without a leader. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. and on the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. click Text.

19 Type the following text. and drag it to the new sheet. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. right-click Sheets (all). Creating a Component Legend | 353 . 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. click to add text with a single-segment leader. 23 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. The text note with leader is added to the legend. select Level 4.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. click OK to accept the default titleblock. and click New Sheet. under Floor Plans.

drag it onto the sheet. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. The open drawings are both visible. under Legends. 26 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. 29 In the Project Browser. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select 4th Floor Wall Types. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet.25 In the Project Browser. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. double-click Level 4. under Floor Plans.

33 In the floor plan view. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. select the Wall Type 2 component. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. Creating a Component Legend | 355 . click (Match Type). Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. 34 Select the patio divider wall. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 35 On the View Control Bar. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. select Detail Level: Medium.

356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click 37 Save the file. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. In this exercise.36 Optionally. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. double-click Level 4. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. or changes in building material availability. You can create a sequence of revisions. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. contractor inquiries. These changes can be due to owner requests. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Using the table.rvt. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract.

for Numbering. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. For example. 7 Under Show. If you select Per Sheet. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. verify that Per Project is selected. When Issued is selected. the revision is locked and issued to the field. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. if the active revision is number 1. In general. yet as concise as possible. In most instances. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . If Visible is not selected. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. 5 For Description. When you use this option.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. type a date.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Revision clouds have read-only properties. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 3 Select the divider.8 Click OK. click Modify. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Select the divider. under Floor Plans. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. 4 On the Edit toolbar. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. including revision number and revision date. click (Move). 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise.rvt. double-click Level 4. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 9 Save the file. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. 6 On the Design Bar. you make changes to the project floor plan. move the cursor up.

NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. select Snaps Off. and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 8 In the drawing area. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click near the partition you moved. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. click Revision Cloud. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. In the Snaps dialog.

Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. for Line Weight. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. you load a revision tag into the project. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. click the Annotation Objects tab. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 16 Click OK. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. select 6. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 17 Save the file.

If the cursor is just inside the cloud. click OK. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. Because you chose to number by project. click Training Files. 6 Click Load. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. 10 In the drawing area. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. you need to add one. click Tag ➤ By Category. double-click Level 4. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left.rfa. the cloud is tagged as number 1. under Floor Plans. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Leader. Working with Revisions In this exercise. 11 Click to place the tag. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 5 In the Tags dialog. 4 On the Options Bar. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud.rvt. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. You then issue a revision. 8 In the Tags dialog. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 .Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Tags. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. scroll down to Revision Clouds. 12 Save the file. and because the revision is the first in the project. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag.

Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 8 Add another revision row. and enter a date for the revision. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. select Issued. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. NOTE After you issue a revision. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. 7 For Description. You do this by issuing the revision. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. you prevent further changes to the revision. You can continue to add revisions. and click OK. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions.Unnamed.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. double-click A107 . 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. 9 Click OK. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. and enter a date. click Add. type Modify Paving Area. with the description Relocate Door. you can no longer modify it. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . under Sheets.rvt.

16 Add another revision cloud as shown. double-click Level 4. 10 In the Project Browser. 17 Using the same method learned previously. under Sheets (all). apply Seq.Unnamed. select Revision Cloud. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. 19 To add tags. 13 Click Finish Sketch. Working with Revisions | 363 . in the drawing area. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. 12 In the drawing area. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. select Tag ➤ By Category. 3 . 15 On the Options Bar. select the revision cloud. select Seq. click to add a revision clouds.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. for Revision. 11 On the Drafting tab. 20 On the Project Browser. 2 . under Floor Plans.Modify Paving Area. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. double-click A107 . Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule.

select Alphabetic. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. 26 In the drawing area. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. clear Issued. select the titleblock. For each revision. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . height. beginning with "D". You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. You do this so that the revision can be changed. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. Click Options. delete the first 3 characters. for Numbering. for Sequence. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. you edit the titleblock family. 25 Click OK twice. and rotation) to the revision schedule.

Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. click Load into Projects. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. right-click Revision Schedule. Select Outline. 28 In the alert dialog. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. for Appearance. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and click Properties. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. click Modify. Select Grid lines. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. click Yes. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. and press DELETE. Clear Blank row before data. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. select Bottom-up. 34 On the Design Bar. click Edit. for Build Schedule. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. Working with Revisions | 365 . and drag it above the schedule area. 33 Select the schedule header. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. click Edit Family.27 On the Options Bar. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. under Other. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. click Yes. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected.

open the titleblock family for editing. and click Properties. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. click Edit. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. select User defined. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other.. for Rotation on Sheet. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. When the height property is variable. 46 Click OK twice. 40 Select the revision schedule header. select 90° Counterclockwise. With a user-defined height. for Heading. for Height. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. enter Rev. for Formatting. and on the Options Bar. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. 45 On the Appearance tab. select the revision schedule. right-click Revision Schedule.

click Yes. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. you learn to import information (such as images. Importing from Other Applications | 367 . and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. text.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 51 Save the file. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. click Load into Projects. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson.

rvt. click Training Files. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . double-click T .Title Sheet. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. click to add text without a leader.JPG. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo.rvt. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. under Sheets. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click T .Title Sheet. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. and place it on a sheet. click Text. for Leader. click Modify.Importing Image Files In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Sheets. 3 On the Options Bar. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo.

6 Select the text. 9 On the Design Bar. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. 11 Save the file. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 . 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy.doc text file in another window.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. with the new text box still selected. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. click Modify. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.

and open Common\Fixture Schedule. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. click Training Files. and click Save. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. for File name. double-click A102 .rvt. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. 5 Click OK.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and saved as Fixture Schedule. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog.Unit 18. 12 Save the file. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . under Sheets. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. 3 In Microsoft Excel. 10 On the Design Bar. type Fixture Schedule.mdi.JPG. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. select the document writer. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. click Modify. click File menu ➤ Print.JPG. for Name. This exercise demonstrates a common method. This process may vary from system to system. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. This step has been completed for you. click Desktop. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. 4 Under Printer.xls. 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog.

for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. or footprint. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. you break up the plan into sections. The large floor plan. as well as a large lab building. called dependent views. 371 . To effectively document this project.

372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 .Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. click Training Files.

4 In the Rename View dialog. under Level 2. for Name. The dependent view opens. enter Level 2 . 6 In the drawing area.Aviary. and the model crop is the interior crop region. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . under Floor Plans. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and click OK. double-click Level 2. select the crop region. click Zoom To Fit. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. 3 In the Project Browser. 5 Click in the drawing area. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and click Rename. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building.

8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). click (Hide Crop Region). Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 . 9 On the View Control Bar.

16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). enter Level 2 . 11 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and click Rename. 13 In the Rename View dialog.Labs. right-click Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. 12 In the Project Browser. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and on the Zoom flyout. and on the Zoom flyout. for Name. 14 Click in the drawing area.10 Click in the drawing area. 15 Select the crop region. click Zoom To Fit.

18 On the Design Bar.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. click Modify. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). click Zoom To Fit. and on the Zoom flyout. 19 On the View Control Bar. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. click Matchline. under Floor Plans. 20 Click in the drawing area. double-click Level 2.

24 On the Design Bar. Click above the left corner of the lab building. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and click.■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. click Finish Sketch.

31 In the Project Browser. and click OK. for Name. right-click A101 . 26 In the Object Styles dialog.Aviary. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and drag it onto the sheet. under Floor Plans. 27 Under Matchline. for Line Weight.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. select 9. 33 In the Project Browser. 28 For Line Pattern. click Level 2 . select Double Dash. and click OK. enter Level 2 Aviary. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 . click the Annotation Objects tab. and click Rename. expand Sheets. click OK to accept the default titleblock.Unnamed.

click Modify.35 On the Design Bar. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and place the Level 2 . 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . under Floor Plans. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs.Aviary is selected. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . click View Reference.Labs dependent view on the sheet. double-click Level 2. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. for Target view. 39 On the Options Bar.

for Target view. click Modify.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. click Zoom To Fit. 44 On the Design Bar.Labs. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. 41 On the Options Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . 45 On the Zoom flyout. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.

the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. under Floor Plans. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. after modifying the annotation crop region. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. right-click.46 In the Project Browser. click the far right control. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 47 On the View Control Bar. click (Show Crop Region). 49 If. 48 Select the crop region. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area.Aviary. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. double-click Level 2 .

click Zoom To Fit.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). 53 In the Select Views dialog. expand Level 1. and click Apply Dependent Views. 51 On the View Control Bar. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. 52 In the Project Browser. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). but are not placed on sheets. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . select all views in the list. right-click Level 2. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. 55 On the Zoom flyout. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 54 In the Project Browser. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1.

click Training Files. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.57 On the Zoom flyout. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . The matchline is already placed in the view. and double-click South Elevation. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Project Browser.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. right-click South Elevation. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and click Rename.Left. 9 In the Project Browser. cropping the view to the aviary. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 11 Select the crop region. 4 In the Rename View dialog. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. enter South Elevation . Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . and click OK. and click OK. right-click South Elevation. enter South Elevation . and click Rename.Right. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. 3 In the Project Browser. and drag it toward the center of the view. 8 In the Project Browser. 5 In the drawing area. cropping the view to the lab building. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 7 On the View Control Bar. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. expand South Elevation.The dependent view opens. for Name. for Name. click (Hide Crop Region). select the Crop Region. right-click Dependent on South Elevation.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

click Modify. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. Creating a Perspective View on page 403. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. Creating a Perspective View | 403 .15 On the Design Bar.

on the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. The perspective view displays. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Camera.rvt.

If the camera is not shown in the view. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . and select the crop boundary. as shown. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. right-click 3D View 1. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. Depending on camera placement. and click Show Camera. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. under Floor Plans. With the camera shown. and adjust the field of vision. double-click Site. as necessary. in the Project Browser. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser.3 Zoom out.

6 In the Project Browser. enter Exterior . 8 In the Project Browser. double-click Exterior .Day to open the view. right-click 3D View 1. 10 Save the file. and click Rename. and click OK. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 7 In the Rename View dialog. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. under 3D Views.Day.

Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 . modify render settings. and render a daytime view of the exterior. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. under 3D Views.Day. You then duplicate the view. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. c_Pool_House_in_progress. double-click Exterior .Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering.

You adjust cloud settings as required. 7 In the Rendering dialog. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. and click Rename. In this case. 5 In the Rename dialog. under Background. 3pm. 6 Click OK twice. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. under Lighting. for Setting. NOTE If a background image is required. enter Spring Equinox . 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select Edit/New. 8 Under Quality. and click Render. You create a location and time for the rendering. select Sky: Cloudy. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Medium. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. 3 In the Rendering dialog. for New. click (Show Rendering Dialog).Santa Monica. for Sun. select Spring Equinox.

After the image is rendered. click Show the rendering. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. click Export. select Portable Network Graphics (*. For Files of type. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.png). 10 In the Rendering dialog. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . click Show the model. Click Save. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog.9 In the Rendering dialog. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. click Desktop.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . select Exterior: Artificial only. add 30 :Sconce Light . 22 Using the same method. for Scheme. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. enter Pool Lights. press and hold SHIFT. and click Move to Group.Flat Round : 60W . You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Render. right-click Exterior . and click OK. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. select the first light. under 3D Views.Night.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . enter Pool House Lights. you duplicate the view and change the settings. 25 Using the same method.Night.Flat Round : 60W . under Lighting. click Dialog). under Ungrouped Lights.120V to the Pool Lights group. click New.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser.120V. verify that Pool Lights is selected. click OK. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . 24 In the New Light Group dialog. under Group Options. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. and select the last light. 16 With the Exterior . and click Artificial Lights. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. for Name. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . and click OK.Flat Round : 60W . 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. click New. for Name.Day. on the View Control Bar.Flat Round : 60W .Night view open. and click OK. under Ungrouped Lights. under Group Options. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. To select a sequential list. dialog.Exterior . 27 In the Rendering dialog.Day view to Exterior . (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog.

29 In the Exposure Control dialog. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. 32 Save the file. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. and click OK. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. under Image. enter 4. you change the brightness of the exposure. for Exposure Value. click Show the model. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. After the image is rendered. click Adjust Exposure. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. 30 In the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View | 411 . Rendering an Interior View on page 411.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. In this example.

and finally. Adding RPC People In this exercise. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. define the perspective view and rendering settings. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house.rvt. render the views. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view.

■ (Rotate). Exact placement is not important. under Floor Plans. the person’s line of sight. select RPC Female : YinYin. 4 In the Type Selector. Adding RPC People | 413 . click Modify. click Component. 6 Select the figure.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. and place the component inside the pool house. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. double-click Level 1. and on the Edit toolbar. 5 On the Design Bar. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered.

under Parameters. By default. click Edit/New. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. click Edit. on the Options Bar. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). click Modify. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . for Render Appearance Properties. select Cast Reflections. under Identity Data. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. 13 On the Design Bar. 12 Click OK 3 times. In order to see the figure’s reflection. you can enable this option. 14 Save the file.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance.

You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. click Camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process.15 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt.

select Section Box. and click Properties. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. 4 In the Project Browser. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. under 3D Views.The perspective view displays. right-click 3D View 1. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. under Extents. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

you display an elevation/section view and a plan view.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. under Elevations (Building Elevations). double-click Level 1. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . double-click South. 11 In the 3D view. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. In order to accurately adjust the section box. 8 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. in addition to the 3D view. select the section box. 9 In the Project Browser.

12 In the floor plan view. size the box as shown. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 14 In the 3D view. select the section box. size the box as shown. 13 In the South Elevation view. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. right-click.

15 Maximize the 3D view. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. doors that contain windows or glass. and render the interior view. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. 17 Save the file. and curtain walls. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. To create a daytime view. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior.

420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. under Lighting. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. 8 In the Rendering dialog. for Scheme. select Draft.Night. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. right-click 3D View 1. you turn them off for this scene. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog.rvt. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. After these settings are established. click (Show Rendering Dialog). clear Pool Lights.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. under 3D Views. and click OK. and click OK. 5 Click Artificial Lights. 3 On the View Control Bar. for Setting. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. click Render. enter Interior . 7 Under Quality. select Interior: Artificial only. You can specify a lower quality. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. 4 In the Rendering dialog. 2 In the Rename View dialog. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Santa Monica. but the space will receive standard daylighting. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes.9 Close the Rendering dialog. (Show Rendering Dialog). In this case. By default they are turned off. right-click Interior .Night. 3pm. You create a view for the interior during the day. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . and click OK. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. select Edit. For sunlit interiors. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. for Daylight Portal Options. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views.Day. click 14 For Setting. select Region. for Sun. select Spring Equinox . For more information on daylight portals. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. select Curtain Walls. in order to turn on daylight portals. the daylight portals can be turned on. click Copy To Custom. 17 In the Rendering dialog. select Interior: Sun only. and click Render. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. 13 In the Rendering dialog. The preset schemes are read-only. you must create a custom setting. for Scheme.

In the next steps. and close the Rendering dialog. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. click Properties). and on the Options Bar. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. 20 In the Rendering dialog. For Saturation. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect.18 In the Rendering dialog. enter 1. select the column on the right. click Adjust Exposure. click Show the model. enter 10. Click OK. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. under Image.

30 In the drawing area. enter 5''. and click OK. select High. 28 In the Rendering dialog. and on the Options Bar. add a bump map to create texture. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. select Scale (locked proportions). click Settings menu ➤ Materials. under Output Settings. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. for Setting. As size and DPI are increased. 26 Click Update Preview. select Printer. select Unfinished. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . 23 With the column still selected. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. For Rotate. Click OK. click the dimensions for Size. 24 In the Materials dialog. For Width. click OK.6. select the crop boundary. select Based on wood grain. select Wood. enter 90. For Bump. clear Region. 32 In the Rendering dialog. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 29 In the Rendering dialog. You change the varnish setting. for Resolution.22 In the Element Properties dialog. For Amount. and click Render. the render time increases significantly.

The rendered image displays. or section view. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. In a plan view. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. elevation. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. but you can also define it in a 3D. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. independent of the Revit Architecture software. The walkthrough path is a spline. Usually. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. you rendered an exterior and an interior view.

Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . on the Options Bar. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. and click the tab in the context menu. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. expand Floor Plans. click Training Files.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. If you prefer to use metric values. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. and change unit formats as desired. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. click Settings ➤ Project Units. click Walkthrough. and double-click 1st Floor. right-click in the Design Bar. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. proceeds through the dining room. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse.rvt. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. verify that Perspective is selected. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. and open Common\c_Townhouse. and ends in the far corner of the living room. expand Views (all).

and double-click Walkthrough 1. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. on the Options Bar.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. click Finish. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown.

12 On the View menu. for Width. select the crop boundary. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 14 Click . The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. and click OK. 11 Under Change. click the dimensions for Size. 16 On the Options Bar. 17 Click . and select the crop boundary. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. enter 9''. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. for Frame. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. enter 16''. verify that Field of view is selected. on the Options Bar. and for Height. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . enter 1. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). click Edit Walkthrough. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). If it is not.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips.

proceed to the next exercise. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise.rvt. press ESC. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Edit Walkthrough. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 1st Floor. clear Far Clip Active. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. under Extents. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. c_Townhouse. under Floor Plans. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera.The walkthrough plays. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. and click OK. click (Element Properties). Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. 2 On the Options Bar.

5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. You can move any camera target or key frame position. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. for Controls. and drag it to the location shown. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 . so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. 7 Click the third key frame position. 6 On the Options Bar. select Path.

. c_Townhouse. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system.rvt. 9 To play the walkthrough. If you are unsure of what option to use. reducing the size of the image. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. for Compressor. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. or rendering. for Frames/sec. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. 3 Under Format. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Save. on the Options Bar. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. click File menu ➤ Save As. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. shading. under Output Length. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. specifying the number of frames. shading with edges. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. enter 15. under Walkthroughs. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. 8 If you want to save this exercise. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. The walkthrough is recorded. click Edit Walkthrough. and click OK. double-click Walkthrough 1. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. and save the exercise file with a unique name. for Model Graphics Style. hidden line. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. and click OK.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. select <Shading>. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. When you export the walkthrough. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users.

A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. In this tutorial. 431 . More specifically. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images.

rvt. click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the View toolbar. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. (SteeringWheels).Creating a Solar Study . you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. click shown. and double-click 01 Entry. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view.Courtyard View In this exercise. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . expand Views (all). click Camera. A 3D view is created. as shown. and open Common\c_Solar_Study.

6 Click the view boundary to select it. you create a section cutaway view. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Rename.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise.5 On the Design Bar. click Section. right-click 3D View 1. enter Solar Study .Courtyard View. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 9 On the File menu. click Modify. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. 3 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. if necessary. and click OK. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. double-click 01 Entry. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. under Floor Plans. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Project Browser. click Save As. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . as shown. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. expand 3D Views. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433.

12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. click Modify. 6 To view the section. 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. 13 On the Design Bar. and click Rename. (SteeringWheels).5 On the Design Bar. 11 On the SteeringWheel. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. click 10 On the View toolbar. expand Sections. click . as shown. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. click Modify. right-click Section 1. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. double-click the section head. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 7 In the Project Browser.

so no shadows will be cast from these elements. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. including the house. In some cases. On the Annotation Categories tab. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. 6 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. and click Rename. 4 In the Project Browser. you create a plan cutaway view. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. as shown. 16 On the View Control Bar. do not display many elements in 3D. under Floor Plans. then select Medium.14 In the Project Browser. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. Typical plan views. right-click {3D}. under 3D Views. 17 To hide the section box. under Floor Plans. clear Section Boxes. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. click Save. and click Rename. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . and click OK. 18 On the File menu. then Fine. click Callout. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. click . 5 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. and click OK. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry. such as floor plans and ceiling plans.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. so you can see into the building from the top. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 11 On the Design Bar. as shown. 15 Select the Roof. 16 On the View Control Bar.8 On the View toolbar. 9 On the SteeringWheel. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. click Modify. as shown. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. click (SteeringWheels).

under 3D Views. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 .Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway.17 On the View Control Bar. 21 On the File menu. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. 20 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. under 3D Views. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. right-click {3D}. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . and click OK. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. click Save. 18 In the Project Browser. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson.

date range.Creating Solar Studies . and time. Los Angeles.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. and click OK. click . . CA. and click Duplicate. single-day. select Los Angeles. enter Summer Solstice. USA is selected. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. you specify the location. click . 9 In the Name dialog. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 4 For Sun Position. expand Views (all). For the Single-Day solar study. or multi-day solar study. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. for City. For the Multi-Day solar study. You can create a still.Boston. MA. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. 3 Select Cast Shadows. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. and time range. you specify the location. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. 10 Under Place. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. leave the slider at 50. 2 On the View Control Bar. Click the Single-Day tab. USA. date. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . click click OK. For this study. expand 3D Views. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.

and click OK. on the Single-Day tab. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. click OK. For Time Range. select Winter Solstice. 8 On the Options Bar. confirm that Summer Solstice. 2008. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. ■ For Time Interval. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. 16 In the Name dialog. for Date. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 2008. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. select June 22. click . 14 In this case. and click Duplicate. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. enter Winter Solstice. 7 On the Options Bar. enter 10 and press ENTER. click OK.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. and click OK. under Frame. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 19 On the File menu. 2 On the View Control Bar. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.Courtyard View is currently displayed. 6 On the View Control Bar. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. Los Angeles. Los Angeles is selected. Los Angeles. Clear Ground Plane at Level. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. click Save. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. and click OK. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. for Sun Position. Under Frame. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select December 22. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 .rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. click . enter 20 and press ENTER.

The solar study animation plays. click To play the animation from start to finish. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Sun Position. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. click OK. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. click . click To display the next sequential frame. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. 14 On the Options Bar. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. click . Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. click . on the Single-Day tab.■ To display the next key frame. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. select Summer Solstice. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. . Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. click Text. 13 On the View Control Bar. approximately as shown. . double-click 01 Entry. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. Los Angeles. .

click Lines. On the Options Bar. as shown. click . 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. approximately as shown. 8 For Sun Position. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. as shown.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . verify that Cast Shadows is selected. Click and enter Dining. expand 3D Views. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click . Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. 6 On the View Control Bar. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. 5 In the Project Browser.

12 In the drawing area. and click OK. 14 Click outside of the section box. clear Section Boxes. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . select Summer Solstice. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. verify that the value is set to 15. select Section Boxes. 15 To hide the section box. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. On the Annotation Categories tab. ■ For Frames per second. as shown. On the Annotation Categories tab. if necessary. select the section box. under Output Length. Los Angeles. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. select Frame Range.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 11 To display the section box. and click OK. on the Single-Day tab. and click OK. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. click OK. and enter 5 to 50.

For File Name. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. verify that Hidden Line is selected. and click OK. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. verify that Hidden Line is selected. and enter 5 to 10. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. of the animation separately. Click OK. click . Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. select Frame Range. Los Angeles. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. select AVI Files. For Frames per second. select Winter Solstice. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . or frame. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. Under Format. To maintain the proportions of the frame. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. under Output Length. verify that the value is set to 15. enter 450 in the first field (width). 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. for Compressor. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. for Model Graphics Style. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Dimensions. you open each image. 2 On the View Control Bar.Los Angeles. for Model Graphics Style. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. 3 For Sun Position. For Files of Type. To view the animation. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. on the Single-Day tab. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . click OK.■ ■ Under Format.

enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . TIFF. click the Desktop icon. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day.■ For Dimensions. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. or any single-frame format. click Save. For File name. or GIF. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. 8 Click Save. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. In this example. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Click OK. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. under 3D Views. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped.Los Angeles. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. depending on the Frame Range. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. enter 450 in the first field (width). such as JPEG. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . as shown: 9 On the File menu. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. select PNG. BMP. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. For Files of Type. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed.

2 Select the section box in the drawing area. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. as shown. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 . NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen.

and click Duplicate. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 8 On the View Control Bar. click the Multi-Day tab.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. and click OK. and click OK. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. and on the View Control Bar. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . clear Section Boxes. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. for File name enter 2pm . click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Sun Position. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 12 In the Name dialog. specify 2:00 pm. USA. MA. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. select One week.Boston. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK.Los Angeles . For Time Interval. 5 Select the roof. click OK. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain.Week Interval. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. For Time. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. On the Annotation Categories tab.

When you mirror a project. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. double-click 01 Entry. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save.West or North . 17 On the View Control Bar. click OK. you mirror all model elements. Re-orienting the Project | 447 . You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. for File Name. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. such as East . and click OK.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. for Compressor.South. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. under Floor Plans. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. and annotations in non-drafting views. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. Click the Desktop icon. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. In the Length/Format dialog. model views. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. and click Save. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off.

6 On the Standard toolbar. select East . NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. right-click. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.West. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. In this exercise.West axis. The project is mirrored along the East . and click OK. For additional information. 2 In the drawing area. select the roof.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Then. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. under 3D Views. click OK. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. 5 In the warning dialog. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North.

and select Winter Solstice. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. For example. click Apply.3 On the View Control Bar. 12 Under Date and Time. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. select Cast Shadows. click the Still tab. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify 11:00 AM for time. select Summer Solstice. click . and click OK. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click . 10 Under Date and Time. 11 For Sun Position. 8 For Sun Position. Orienting to True North | 449 . and click OK. and click OK. change the time back to 12:00 PM. 5 For Sun Position. click . on the Still tab.

and select Winter Solstice. When a project is started. under Floor Plans. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. This process establishes the view setting to True North. for Orientation. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 15 For Sun Position. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. 19 In the Project Browser. right click 01 Entry. the view settings must be set for True North. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. 18 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. double-click 01 Entry. click . IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . select True North. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). and click OK. 14 On the View Control Bar. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. click OK. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. and click OK. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. click the Still tab. click OK. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North.

click toward the top of the screen. Orienting to True North | 451 . click above the end of the magenta line representing True North. ■ To establish the new direction of True North.■ To establish the True North direction. as shown. The floor plan rotates in the view.

click the Still tab. select Project North.23 In the Project Browser. right-click. 33 For Sun Position. right-click 01 Entry. select True North Orientation. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click . select Summer Solstice. and click OK. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. right-click 01 Entry. enter True North Orientation. and click Element Properties. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. 32 On the View Control Bar. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Rename. for Orientation. 27 In the Rename View dialog. under 3D Views. for Orientation. 28 In the Project Browser. right-click. select True North. 25 In the Project Browser. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. and click OK. and click Apply. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Properties.

Los Angeles. under Format. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. and click OK. verify that AVI Files is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. click the Single-Day tab. for Compressor. For Files of Type. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. Click Save. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. Click OK. for Dimensions. click the Desktop icon. enter 600 in the first field. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. For File Name. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. click Summer Solstice. click OK. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. In the Length/Format dialog. Orienting to True North | 453 .

(Show Rendering Dialog). Under Lighting. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. Rendered views do not have this limitation. select Interior: Sun only. capturing it. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. select Edit/New. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. and click OK. In the Name dialog. and click OK.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. 2 In the Project Browser. 1 In the Project Browser. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. select 12/22. and click Duplicate. select Winter Solstice. select Medium. 3 On the View Control Bar. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. for Date and Time. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Setting. under 3D Views. under Quality. Since a rendered image is temporary. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. for Scheme. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. In this exercise.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. under 3D Views. and 2:00 PM. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. and exporting it as a JPEG image. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . under Settings. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. For Sun. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. click Render. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room.

enter living area_winter solstice. and click OK. verify that JPEG Files is selected. click Save to Project. click Export. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. and click Save. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. Rendering an Interior View | 455 .6 In the Rendering dialog. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. For Files of type. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. click Desktop.

456 .

457 . length. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. Whether the audience is the general contractor. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. In this tutorial. an outside reviewer.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. and details. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. In this series of exercises. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. elevations. sections. They include rendering. linework. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. Co-house. When organizing presentation graphics. For the realistic approach. you can choose between realism and stylistics. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. advanced model graphics. or the client. however. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. Other tools in the software. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. type. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. and section boxes. Using the pre-built building model. a consultant. you explore the stylistic approach.

you create a copy of the plan. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. To fit the floor plan into the analytique. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. you create a presentation floor plan.

under Floor Plans. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. click Training Files. 2 In the Project Browser. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click Rename. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. Cnst. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. right-click 2nd Flr. and click OK. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click in the drawing area. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Cnst. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. exit the menu.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise.

dimensions. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . This turns off the visibility of all tags. 11 In the Save As directory. sections. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. expand the Stairs category. click the Scale control and select 1:100. and other annotations in this view. navigate to the folder of your choice.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. No annotations display in the view. elevations. Down Arrow. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. and clear DOWN Text. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. click the Annotation Categories tab. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. this represents the view getting smaller. UP Text. 6 Click the Model Categories tab.rvt. and click Save. and Up Arrow. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 8 Click OK. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. 7 Under Visibility.

6 Under Settings. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. specify 10/27. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. If you select a different city. for Date and Time. click OK. you can select any city. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. select Boston. and click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. The higher the number. specify 35. click . the darker the shadows. At that place. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. 7 For Place. you can create. 1:00 PM. select Sun and Shadow Settings. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. modify. on the Still tab. select Cast Shadows. Cnst. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 9 For City. click the Place tab. 3 On the View Control Bar. select By Date. MA. NOTE For this step.rvt. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click (Shadows Off). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Within a project. double-click it in the Project Browser. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 12 Click OK. ■ For Contrast. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click . Time and Place. however. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and select 1st Flr. For Sun Position.

This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. . 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click (Shadows On). for Sun Position. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. clear Ground Plane at Level. and click Advanced Model Graphics. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. and click OK. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. under Settings. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. click OK.

right-click the Design Bar. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Views dialog. click Sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click View. click Add View. The viewport displays at the cursor.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to place it. and notice the view title. TIP If the View tab is not available. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 . and click Add View to Sheet. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. and click OK. select Arch Portrait. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. click Modify. 6 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. click Edit/New. click . 12 In the Name dialog. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 11 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. for Show Title. 9 On the Options Bar. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. click OK. To accomplish this. select No. under Graphics. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. The viewport no longer displays a view title.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. and click Activate View. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. enter Presentation. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. For this analytique. 13 In the Type Properties dialog.

23 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 In the Type Selector. click . 18 On the Options Bar. and select Chain. 22 On the Design Bar. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. When you finish drawing the chain. click Edit/New. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. and the boundary of the region. click Region Properties. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. click Filled Region. select Invisible lines. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. If necessary. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . 20 On the Options Bar.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. fill properties. click . TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines.

27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. select Solid fill. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. under Identity Data. and click OK. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. under Name. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson.24 In the Type Properties dialog. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Duplicate. enter Presentation. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. under Graphics. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. enter Solid Black. click . and click View Properties. and click OK. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. for Fill Pattern. for Sheet Name. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. click Finish Sketch. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Deactivate View. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. scroll down. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. and click OK. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. 25 In the Name dialog.

Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. right-click South. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser.

select By Date. on the Model Categories tab. and click Advanced Model Graphics. exit the menu. and clear Elevation Swing. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. and click OK.2 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. enter Presentation South Elevation. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. specify 35. and click OK. By changing the angle of the sun. click Duplicate. under Pattern Overrides. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. click OK. 9 Click OK. 18 For Time. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 14 For Sun Position. select Cast Shadows. right-click Copy of South. and click Rename. specify 2:30 PM. click in the Walls row. clear Visible. 13 For Contrast. click Override. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 12 Under Shadow. under Settings. click in the drawing area. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. 11 On the View Control Bar. expand the Doors category. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. scroll up. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click . you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. 16 In the Name dialog. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Elevations. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click (Shadows Off). under Visibility. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Visibility. and click OK. Time and Place. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and clear Show annotation categories in this view.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Add View. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469.rvt.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 .Presentation. and click Add View to Sheet. 3 In the Views dialog. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. double-click A105 . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane.

The view title no longer displays.The viewport displays a view title. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Viewport : Presentation. 5 In the Type Selector.

6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. click Modify. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. 7 On the Design Bar. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique.

Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . for Scale. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. and use the flip arrows if necessary. under Floor Plans. 4 Add the section shown below. Cnst. 3 On the Options Bar.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. double-click 1st Flr. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. click Section. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. select 1: 100.

this view needs to be rotated 180°. To accomplish this. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. click Callout. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. 7 On the Options Bar. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . select 1 : 100. as shown. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Section 2. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. To fit correctly in the analytique. expand Sections (Callout 1).Section 2 is added to the building model. for Scale. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser.

This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 17 Under Visibility. click Override. under Sections (Callout 1). expand the Doors category. and click OK. clear Visible. under Pattern Overrides. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Modify. scroll up. under Sections (Callout 1). click in the Walls row. 15 Under Visibility. right-click Callout of Section 2. click the Model Categories tab. and click OK. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 10 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Project Browser. and clear Elevation Swing. double-click Presentation Section 2. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 11 In the Rename View dialog.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. enter Presentation Section 2. and click Rename.

The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . 22 On the View Control Bar. (Hide Crop Region). 23 Click File menu ➤ Save.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. When you select the crop region. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. 20 Click OK. click The crop regions no longer display. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements.

double-click Presentation Section 2. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). In addition. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. click . you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.rvt. select Cast Shadows. specify the following: Under Shadow. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. click Duplicate. For Contrast. 6 In the Name dialog. specify 35. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). Click Apply. ■ For Sun Position. In the steps that follow. The shadows do not offer much contrast. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. in the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. 3 On the View Control Bar. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar.

select Directly. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. NOTE The line style. select Silhouette Edges. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. and click OK. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. was added to this training file for training purposes. Click OK. click (Shadows On). for Silhouette style. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click OK. For Altitude. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. specify 70°. For Azimuth. specify 135°. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. Silhouette Edges. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Select Relative to View.

and click Add View to Sheet. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Sheets (all). double-click A105 . Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and click to place the selected view.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. 3 In the Views dialog.Presentation. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. click Add View. select Section: Presentation Section 2. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°.

click (Rotate). move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. under Sections (Callout 1). Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. select Viewport : Presentation. double-click Section 2. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. In the steps that follow. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. To rotate an object. The section needs to be rotated 180°. 9 On the Edit toolbar. and press Enter. you click to specify the start radius. Using a clock as a reference. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. The view title no longer displays.5 In the Type Selector.

Presentation.The callout rotates 180°. double-click A105 . Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. under Sheets (all).

15 On the Design Bar. After applying the view template to a new section view. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. click Modify. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 . and drag it up and to the left as shown. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. 17 Proceed with the next exercise.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481.

Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the View Templates dialog. and click OK.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. right-click Section 1. under Sections (Type 1). 6 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Rename View dialog. enter Presentation Section 1. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. under Sections (Type 1). 3 In the New View Template dialog. you can simply apply the presentation view template. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click Presentation Section 2. click OK. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. enter Presentation. and click Rename. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. under Sections (Callout 1).rvt. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Section 1. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template.

The furniture. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Section: Presentation Section 1. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. and click Deactivate View. and elevation swings no longer display. select 90° Counterclockwise. select Viewport : Presentation. and click OK. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. 18 Right-click the viewport. click Add View. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Presentation. double-click A105 . for Rotation on Sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. 15 Right-click the viewport. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. 12 In the Views dialog. annotations. and click Activate View. under Names. and click OK. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. under Sheets (all). Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. under Graphics.Presentation. 14 In the Type Selector. lighting fixtures. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view.9 In the Apply View Template dialog.

Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. such as a tracery window or a column capital. In this exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. traditional analytiques contain a detail.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 21 Proceed with the next exercise. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique.

and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. right-click Callout of Section 1. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Sections (Callout 1).Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Modify. After you add the callout. 4 In the Project Browser. as shown. double-click Section 1. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. click Callout. and click Rename. select the callout. under Sections (Type 1). 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown.

9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and click View Properties. under Sections (Callout 1). 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. double-click Presentation Callout. 6 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation Callout. as shown. and click OK.5 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Select the crop region. clear Annotation Crop. clear Crop Region Visible. under Extents. 8 Right-click. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap.

select Custom. and click Activate View. and click Add View to Sheet. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 14 In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click A105 . click Add View. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 .Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. under Sheets (all). 12 In the Views dialog. For Scale Value 1. click Modify. Click OK. specify 22. 15 On the Design Bar. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Section: Presentation Callout.Presentation.

the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. click Region Properties. click Filled Region. activate the viewport. and move it to the position shown below. When finished. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and make adjustments as necessary. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. double-click Presentation Callout. In the steps that follow. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. click Edit/New. and click Deactivate View.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. under Sections (Callout 1). 23 On the Design Bar.

on the Design Bar. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. click Filled Region. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. and click Activate View. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 .Presentation. 28 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. select Solid fill. click . and click OK 3 times. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. for Fill Pattern. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. When you are finished.25 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. double-click A105 . You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once.

34 Select the crop region. The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 33 On the View Control Bar. and sketch the rectangle shown below. 32 On the Design Bar. click .31 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. click (Show Crop Region). and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays.

and click Deactivate View. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson.35 On the View Control Bar. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. click (Hide Crop Region). 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport.

click the Scale control. 3 On the View Control Bar. click (Shadows Off). and apply shadows to the views. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. under 3D Views.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. 5 On the View Control Bar.rvt. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. and click 1 : 200. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . You then add each view to the presentation sheet. double-click Isometric. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. and click Advanced Model Graphics.

right-click Copy of Isometric 1. For Azimuth. and click Rename. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . For Contrast. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. and click OK. and click OK. and click OK. and click Rename. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click . under 3D Views. 12 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Isometric. and click OK. 15 In the Rename View dialog. select Cast Shadows. enter Isometric 2. For Sun Position. under 3D Views. under Extents. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. double-click Isometric 2. 13 In the Project Browser. in the list. enter Isometric 1. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. right-click Isometric 1. Select Ground Plane at Level. A section box displays around the building model. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Directly. select Silhouette Edges. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Section Box. specify 35. and click OK. under 3D Views. specify 45°. under 3D Views. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. Select 1st Flr. for Silhouette style. Select Relative to View. For Altitude. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. specify 135°. click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog. 14 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. Cnst. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.

You can use this to rotate the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . TIP Notice the rotation symbol. as shown. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. When you are finished. click Modify on the Design Bar.19 Select the section box. Grips display on each face of the section box.

and click OK. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. make a copy of the view. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. the stairs and railings may display. clear Section Boxes. 25 To hide the section box. On the Annotation Categories tab. 23 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. Next. 31 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Project Browser. right-click Isometric 2. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. If desired. right-click Copy of Isometric 2.Presentation. under 3D Views. 29 To hide the section box. under Sheets (all). select Viewport : Presentation. double-click A105 . and click OK. under 3D Views. The section box no longer displays. clear Section Boxes. 27 Select the section box. double-click Isometric 3. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. 22 In the Project Browser. In the Type Selector. you can adjust the plane location. click Modify on the Design Bar. and click OK. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. double-click Isometric 2. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. 21 In the Project Browser. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . When you are finished. On the Annotation Categories tab. under 3D Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under 3D Views. enter Isometric 3.

The filled region partially covers the view.32 In the Project Browser. In the Type Selector. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. select Viewport : Presentation. 33 In the Project Browser. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Viewport : Presentation. In the Type Selector. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown.

select Transparent. and click Activate View. click Edit/New. click Lines. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. click Edit. 35 Select the poche filled region. This will make it easier to draw lines. 39 For Background. 36 On the Design Bar. for Fill Patterns. 41 On the Design Bar. select Concrete. On the Options Bar.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. The image below shows the redrawn lines. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 Using the drawing tools. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 40 Click OK twice. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. click Region Properties.

45 In the Type Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 44 In the Element Properties dialog.43 On the Design Bar. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. for Fill Pattern. and click Deactivate View. 47 On the Design Bar. 46 Click OK twice. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. click Edit/New. select Solid fill. click Region Properties.

then you specify the eye direction and range. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. The view opens immediately. under Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you add it to the presentation sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. double-click 1st Flr. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model.rvt. a cutaway perspective view. click Camera. Cnst. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. you create the final view for the analytique.

and click Advanced Model Graphics. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). For Sun Position. select Silhouette Edges. specify the following: Under Shadow. for Name. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify 35. click . select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. for Silhouette style. For Contrast. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Cast Shadows.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. and click OK. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 6 On the View Control Bar.

Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 .Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. A section box now cuts through the building model. select Section Box. and click OK. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. 12 Select the section box. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. Grips display on each plane of the section box.

Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 . click Size. 17 Under Model Crop Size. 21 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). under 3D Views. enter 165 mm. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. for Width. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. select Viewport : Presentation. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. and click OK. select Scale (locked proportions). click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Change. click (Hide Crop Region). and click OK. 15 On the Options Bar.14 Select the crop region. clear Section Boxes. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you must specify the actual size of the image.Presentation. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. On the Annotation Categories tab. In the Type Selector. 18 On the View Control Bar. 19 To hide the section box.

select the same font as the title. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Text. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . double-click it in the Project Browser. and click OK. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. click Text.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Edit/New. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Title. click . enter Description. Annotating the Analytique | 503 .Presentation sheet is not the active view. click Duplicate. and click OK. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. under Text. select a font. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. specify a text size of 6 mm. and click OK. 6 In the Name dialog. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. 10 In the Name dialog. specify a text size of 40 mm. select Text : Title. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. click OK.

click Modify. 16 In the Type Selector.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 18 On the Design Bar. select Text : Description. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

Once the model has been imported. curtain walls. such as walls. that compose the building.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. 507 . you create a small building from the front mass form. In this tutorial. After you import the SketchUp model. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. and roofs. you can easily add detail with Revit components.

click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you create a Revit Architecture project. 6 In the Save As dialog. click OK. select SketchUp Files. or select from a list. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. For Colors. under Template file. For Files of type.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. 10 In the Name dialog. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. For Layers. click OK. click Create Mass. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. click the Massing tab. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. buildings. right-click in the Design Bar. visible elements. Double-click the Common folder. Click the Sketchup file. for File name. select Preserve. enter SketchUp Model. 9 In the informational dialog. enter Import SketchUp. 2 In the New Project dialog. For Import units. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click Save. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. and click OK. click Browse. 4 In the New Project dialog. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and not in the library. select All. select Auto-Detect.rte. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar.skp. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .

The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. curtain walls. ■ ■ For Positioning. 14 On the View toolbar.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. select Manual . such as walls. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. 16 On the Design Bar. In a new project. Click Open.Center. Level 1 is the only choice. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. For Place at level. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. click the Close button. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. click . 17 In the warning dialog. click Finish Mass. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . depending on the complexity of the project. select Level 1. and roofs.

such as walls. verify Basic Roof: Generic . and when the cursor displays a plus sign. and on the View Control Bar. for Level. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. After you create the building from the mass faces. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 4 On the Options Bar. select the face so that it highlights in red. 3 In the Type Selector. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.400mm displays.18 Proceed to the next exercise. that compose the building. curtain walls. click Roof by Face. and roofs. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. verify Level 2 is selected.

) to turn off mass visibility in the view. click to display masses. click Create Roof.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. verify that Select Multiple is selected. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. 6 On the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 9 On the Options Bar. A roof is created from the mass face. click Create Roof. on the View toolbar. To see the new roof. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 .

13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click Roof by Face. click Create Roof. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form.

for Loc Line. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. select Core Face: Exterior.15 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Type Selector. click Wall by Face. 23 On the Options Bar. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. 21 On the Design Bar. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. click Modify to end the command. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 16 On the View toolbar.200mm displays. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. verify Basic Wall: Generic . click roofs that you created. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 .

24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. 25 On the View toolbar. click to view only the walls and roofs. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 28 In the Type Selector. click Curtain System by Face. 26 Click to redisplay the masses.

click Create System. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms.30 On the Options Bar. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. 32 On the View toolbar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 . 31 Using the same technique. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel.

516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . press TAB until the desired wall highlights. and on the Options Bar. click Wall by Face. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. and select it. click Create Roof. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. select the other wall. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. click Create System. click Curtain System. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar.35 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 38 Select the mass face shown below. click Roof by Face. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below.

and select the mass face shown below. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. click to view the building that you have created.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . 43 Click to redisplay the masses. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. 42 On the View toolbar. click Camera. click Wall by Face. Below the right corner of the view. specify a point to place the camera.

and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . The perspective view created by the camera displays. click your building in the view. as shown. specify a point for the camera target.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. to view only the walls. 48 On the View toolbar. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. Click the frame to display its grips. roofs.

click Modify. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 50 On the Options Bar. for Justification. Under Grid 2 Pattern. Under Grid 1 Pattern. and select the left curtain system in the view. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. click . select Center. Click OK. for Justification. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. select Center.

520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.54 Select each roof to display its grips. and click Cancel to end the command. 59 On the View toolbar. click Door. and move the roof edges as shown below. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. 56 In the Project Browser. 63 In the Type Selector. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. double-click 3D View 1. 55 Right-click. under 3D Views. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 . 65 Save and close the drawing.64 Add doors to the building as shown below.

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

or you can use a specific curtain system command.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. Unlike windows. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. For example. panel. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. to resize the system. and they are not windows. you create a curtain system using the wall command. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. grid lines. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. You can add curtain systems with the wall command.rvt. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. Like walls. click Training Files. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. To switch panel types. 525 . and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. you need to change the length of the wall. This affects the entire curtain system. and mullions. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. you need to select a panel. and you can change these elements individually. Like windows. To change grids. you select the grid.

2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and double-click Ground Floor. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown.1 In the Project Browser. click Wall. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector.

7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. Creating an Entrance | 527 . and double-click Southeast Isometric. 8 In the Project Browser.

528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . enter 1200. Click OK.11 Select the curtain system. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. and click (Properties). top constraint. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. top and base attachments. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. using curtain grids. and room bounding. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. For Top Offset.

under Floor Plans. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. click Curtain Grid. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Rename. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. and click OK.a. and resize the crop boundary as shown. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. 18 In the Project Browser. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. Creating an Entrance | 529 . 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 20 In the drawing area.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. double-click GROUND FLOOR. click Elevation. 25 On the Design Bar. right-click Elevation 1 . click Modify.

while pressing CTRL. SIXTH FLOOR. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . THIRD FLOOR. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. FIFTH FLOOR. Click to place another grid line. FOURTH FLOOR. one larger than the other. and SEVENTH FLOOR. click Curtain Grid. 33 On the Design Bar. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. and click OK. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. select SECOND FLOOR. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Click to create a vertical grid. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel.26 While pressing CTRL. select the 3 grid lines you just placed.

Next. you add a doorway to the curtain system. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. and on the Options Bar. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. Instead of using the Door command. Creating an Entrance | 531 . 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. The segment line style changes to dashed. The two segments are removed. and then select the segment above it. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. click Add or Remove Segments. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them.

532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 39 On the Design Bar. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step.38 Using the same method. 40 On the Options Bar. and lock them. 42 Place dimensions as shown. select One Segment. click Curtain Grid.

Use the following image as a guide. 43 Delete the dimensions. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. click in any white space to exit the editor. Creating an Entrance | 533 . Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels.

55 In the Project Browser. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Wireframe. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. not as curtain panels. . you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. 56 In the Project Browser. 54 On the Design Bar. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. They are part of the curtain panel category. This changes the graphics style of the Next. Now. under Elevations. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . under Floor Plans. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. These panels schedule as doors. double-click Entrance Elevation. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. on the new curtain system you added. click view.Next. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 57 On the View Control Bar. The panel changes to a double door. click Training Files. click Modify.rfa. 52 On the Type Selector. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl.

and the solid panels display in white. 61 With the panel still selected. Creating an Entrance | 535 . Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. The glazed panels display in blue. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels.60 On the Type Selector. 65 On the View Control Bar. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. click . click System Panel : Solid. 63 Click OK twice.

click Save As. 2 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Mullion.rvt. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 4 On the Options Bar. select Grid Line Segment. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. select Entire Grid Line. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.68 On the File menu. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress.

so you remove them next. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. there are a few that you do not want. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. however. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. You are going to change some mullion joins. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. clickModify. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 .6 On the Options Bar. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. select All Empty Segments. 10 Delete the mullions below them. because their width reduces the size of the doors. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. you can also right-click. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. 14 Click the top mullion control. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. 16 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Finally. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. 17 Save the file. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. double-click Southeast Isometric. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion.Two mullion join controls display. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 13 Click the lower mullion join control. 15 On the Design Bar.

specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. under Floor Plans. For Top Offset. you add a curtain system using the wall command. double-click GROUND FLOOR. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . for Top Constraint. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. 4 In the Type Selector. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. click Wall. enter 1200. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. Curved Curtain System | 539 . Click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. (Arc passing through three points). select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. Finally. 7 On the Options Bar. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc.

11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. Next. and then sixteenths. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. under Elevations. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . eighths. You are going to use one of these snaps points. 14 In the Project Browser. Divide the halves into quarters. you place grids on the system.10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. double-click East. click Curtain Grid.

you change some panels in the system. select Basic Wall: Generic . you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. to filter out all 19 Save the file. click Modify. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. 16 On the Design Bar. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box.15 Zoom in to the cylinder. Next. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. select the bottom layer of panels. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level.300mm. 18 In the Type Selector. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 .

9 Select the extrusion. under Elevations. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 12 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Design Bar.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 11 On the Design Bar. for Depth. . for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. click Model Lines. select Glass. and click OK. click Lines. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. double-click Exterior. and click . click Finish Sketch. enter 100. 3 In the Project Browser. click . click Training Files. and on the Options Bar.rft. clear Chain. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Design Bar.

20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. right-click.rfa family.14 On the Design Bar. (SteeringWheels).Pattern. 24 On the View toolbar. click 25 On the View toolbar. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. All fourth floor panels are selected. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 23 Right-click.Pattern. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the family as Curtain Panel . and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. select Curtain Panel . 21 In the Type Selector.rfa.Pattern. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. click Modify. and return to the project file. under Floor Plans. 19 In the Project Browser. and click Change Walls Orientation. click (Default 3D View). 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 .

29 In the Type Selector. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. double-click FIFTH FLOOR.The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. All fifth floor panels are selected. under Floor Plans. 27 In the Project Browser. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. 30 Save the file.Solid. select System Panel . and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. All the panels change to the solid panel. right-click. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc.

click Training Files. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. double-click East. and enter 50 mm for the radius. Select Radius. For vertical mullions. . and click OK. and select it. click Mullion.rft. 1 In the Project Browser. Click again to specify the ending point. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. for Profile Usage. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter 8. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. under Elevations. 8 On the Design Bar. select Mullion. click Lines. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. click ■ ■ For Sides.

31 Click . click Modify. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion .rfa. After the new profile is loaded. click Mullion. 20 Select the detail component. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. and click Visibility. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 19 On the Design Bar. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 13 On the Options Bar. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. under 3D Views.11 On the Design Bar. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric. 27 In the Project Browser. and return to the project file. 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. clear Fine. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. click Detail Component. and click OK. click (SteeringWheels). click Visibility. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 28 On the View toolbar. clear Coarse and Medium. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Training Files.rfa. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As.detail. it can be added as a mullion type. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion.rfa family. and click OK.

34 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. 43 Press DELETE. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. click Duplicate. You have placed more mullions than you want. for Profile. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. double-click GROUND FLOOR. and click OK. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 38 On the Options Bar. select Circular Mullion for Family.32 In the Element Properties dialog. 36 Under Construction. 37 Click OK twice. under Floor Plans. 33 Click Edit/New. select All Empty Segments. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. right-click. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . 44 Save the file. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. so you remove the unwanted ones. 40 On the Design Bar. 41 In the Project Browser.

5 On the Options Bar. and you can click to select them all. under Floor Plans. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. and a ruled curtain system. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. you learned to create a curved curtain system.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. 4 On the Design Bar. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. a storefront system. select Defines slope. TIP To chain select all the walls. click Pick Walls. make custom curtain panels and mullions. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and then apply those custom elements to the system. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. double-click TOP OF ROOF. In this lesson. All the inside faces highlight. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. and press TAB.

7 On the Design Bar. Sloped Glazings | 549 . click Finish Roof. select Entire Grid Line. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 11 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. double-click Southeast Isometric. Click OK. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. 16 On the Design Bar. click Roof Properties. under 3D Views. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. click Mullion. enter 600. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. 14 On the Options Bar. 18 Save the file. 9 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 10 In the Project Browser.

click Wall. 4 In the Type Selector. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . double-click GROUND FLOOR. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Storefront System In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. and enter 2400. select Unconnected for Height. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. 5 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

enter 10200 mm. 9 On the Design Bar. even if the wall height changes. which is specified in the type. To see how the grid layout is defined.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. click Modify. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. and press ENTER. 10 In the Project Browser. Storefront System | 551 . 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. double-click Southeast Isometric. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. 12 Select the storefront wall. For this wall. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. This specifies an exact length for the wall. under 3D Views. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. and click . This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. click Edit/New. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. 8 Click the temporary dimension.

the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. under 3D Views. center. you find Number. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. By setting the Angle value. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. enter 15. 1 In the Project Browser. click Mullion. double-click Southeast Isometric.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. or end. select All Empty Segments. 19 Select a curtain grid. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. Angle. Justification. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. In this exercise. 18 On the Options Bar. 20 Save the file. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. and Offset. 16 Click OK. see the Revit Architecture help.

and highlight the model line. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. Curtain System by Lines | 553 . click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 6 Click the highlighted line.3 On the View Control Bar. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight.

you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want.8 Select the highlighted line. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. 11 Click OK. 10 Select the panel. click Curtain Grid. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. 9 On the Design Bar. and click . A panel between the 2 lines is created. Next. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids.

and then eighths. quarters. select System Panel : Solid. 16 In the Type Selector. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. embed a curtain system inside another wall. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. and then eighths. quarters. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. and define a ruled curtain system. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. Finally. right-click. 18 Save the file. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps.

556 .

gable. In this lesson. 557 . you learn to create several different types of roofs. In addition. including hip. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise. shed. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. and soffits to the roofs that you create. and open Metric\m_Roofs. click Training Files. You do not need to create the work plane. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. and low sloped roofs. gutters. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. Before you can sketch the roof profile. mansard. In the left pane of the Open dialog. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise.Roofs 15 In this lesson. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion.rvt. you learn how to add fascia. In this tutorial.

This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. expand Views (all). and so on). and click OK. and double-click Level 1. click Ref Plane. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Name. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. expand Floor Plans. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. 4 Click OK. 5 In the Go To View dialog. click the blue square on the witness line. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion.1 In the Project Browser. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. centerline. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially.

Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 . 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2.

click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Lines.Next. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 13 On the Options Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. sketch the roof profile. select Chain. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane.

click (Join/Unjoin Roof). expand Sections (Type 1).Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . click Modify. Next. and select the second wall. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). expand Views (all). 21 In the Project Browser. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. 17 On the Tools toolbar. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. The roof should resemble the following illustration. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. press CTRL. 19 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the exterior face of the wall. and double-click Section 1. press TAB. 18 Select the edge of the roof. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls.

24 On the Options Bar. click Attach for Top/Base. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562. 26 On the View toolbar. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. click model.

sketch the roof footprint. and enter 600 for Overhang. 5 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. 3 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. m_Roofs.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. verify that Defines slope is selected. expand Floor Plans. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. and double-click Garage Roof. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. click Pick Walls. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Views (all). 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . Next. and click Yes.

select both slope definition lines. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. 11 Press CTRL. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. clear Defines slope. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. click the model. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. and on the Options Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. click (Properties). and click OK. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. click Finish Roof. 14 When you see the informational dialog. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. Next. 15 On the View toolbar. click Modify. under Dimensions. 13 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. By default.

press TAB. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . m_Roofs. and double-click Level 3. expand Views (all). click Pick Walls. 3 On the Options Bar. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. and enter 600 for Overhang. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. When you complete the roof. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. expand Floor Plans. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. clear Defines slope.

14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 17 When you see the informational dialog. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. click Finish Roof. 8 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Lines. sketch the chimney opening. click (Rectangle). sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. add new slope lines to the roof. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. 10 On the View menu. 9 Using automatic snaps. select Defines Slope. select Defines Slope. 15 On the Options bar. Next. Next. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.6 Click to select all the walls. 13 On the Options Bar.

expand Views (all). 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. m_Roofs. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . select Defines slope.18 On the View toolbar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and enter 600 for Overhang. click Pick Walls. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. and double-click Level 2. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.

11 To trim the first line segment. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 10 On the Options Bar. using the following illustration for guidance. and click (Pick Lines). You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. click (Trim/Extend). 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. select the left vertical slope definition line. clear Defines Slope. click Lines. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 9 On the Tools toolbar.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. Next. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. close the roof sketch. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. 7 On the Options Bar.

18 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. 14 Under Constraints. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. click Roof Properties. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. Next. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. 17 On the View toolbar.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 16 On the View toolbar. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. click Modify. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. click Finish Roof. click (SteeringWheels). Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 .

25 Proceed to the next exercise. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration.21 Click (SteeringWheels). and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. join the two remaining walls to the roof. 23 On the Tools toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. Next. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571.

rvt. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. clear Defines Slope. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. enter 0 for Overhang. expand Views (all). 6 On the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 10 To trim the first line segment. and enter 300 for Overhang. m_Roofs. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. click (Trim/Extend). Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . click Pick Walls. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. and double-click Level 2. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. Next. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. press TAB. 9 On the Options Bar. select the left vertical roof line. expand Floor Plans. 4 On the Options Bar.

18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. Next. click Roof Properties. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 16 Under Constraints.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572.rvt. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 1 In the Project Browser. m_Roofs. and press ENTER. 13 On the Options Bar. click 20 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. (SteeringWheels). 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. 19 On the View toolbar. expand 3D Views. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. and click OK. expand Views (all). 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. you add a slope-defining line. select Defines slope. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and double-click 3D. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker.

9 On the Tools menu. 7 On the Options Bar. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . click Slope Arrow. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 11 On the Design Bar. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. 5 On the View menu. expand Floor Plans. click Modify. 4 In the Project Browser. add two new slope arrows. clear Defines Slope. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. 12 On the Options Bar.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. click (Pick Lines). click Ref Plane. Before you can add slope arrows. click Split Walls and Lines. Next. 14 On the Options Bar. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). and enter 600 for Offset. and double-click Level 2. To help locate the position of each split. Next. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you need to add two reference planes.

the adjacent eave heights must align. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. When eave heights differ. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. and click 19 Under Constraints. (Properties). click Modify. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 18 Press CTRL. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 20 Under Dimensions. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. 1 In the Project Browser. 23 Proceed to the next exercise.15 to add the second slope arrow. select both slope arrows. enter 500 for Rise/1000. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. expand Floor Plans.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. and double-click Garage Roof. 16 Repeat steps 13 . you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. m_Roofs. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head.rvt. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then click OK. expand Views (all). and move the cursor to place the arrow. select Slope for Specify. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. 3 On the Options Bar. When you sketch a hip roof. click Edit.

click Finish Roof. and save the exercise file with a unique name. select Defines Slope. 5 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. 14 If you want to save your changes. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. select a method to align the eaves. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. on the File menu. click Align Eaves. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 .4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. Next. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. under Dimensions. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and click OK. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. (Properties). When aligning eaves. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. The eave lines display with a dimension. 12 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. 13 On the View toolbar. click Save As.

select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Elevations. on the Options Bar. 3 Select the roof and. and double-click North. expand Views (all). and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 4 In the Element Properties dialog. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. under Constraints. 1 In the Project Browser. (Properties).rvt. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise.

16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then select Defines slope. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and click OK. click . 10 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 3. click Modify. Next. expand Views (all). 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Pick Lines). click Finish Roof. expand Floor Plans. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. 7 In the Project Browser. click Lines. under Dimensions.6 On the View toolbar. 14 On the Options Bar. press TAB. and select the remaining three lines. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof.

NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. After you add the roof.rvt. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof.17 On the View toolbar. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. click Training Files. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. you add a roof to a building shell. In the left pane of the Open dialog. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Save As. click mansard roof. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise.

6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. click Pick Walls.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . under Floor Plans. 5 In the drawing area. verify that Defines slope is not selected. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. double-click Roof. 4 On the Options Bar.

580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls.EPDM. 11 On the Design Bar.Insulation on Metal Deck . select Steel Truss . as shown: 9 On the Design Bar.Because the walls are not continuous. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Trim/Extend). for Type. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. 7 On the Tools toolbar. click Roof Properties. click Finish Roof. 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. and click OK.

click (Draw Split Lines). double-click the section head to open the section view. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. double-click Roof.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Options Bar. and click to select it. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. The roof has been created. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. In the next steps.

17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. 18 Move the cursor down. 20 Using the same method. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center. and select a point on the opposite roof line. move the cursor horizontally to the left.

The roof is now divided into 6 sections. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. In this exercise. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. exact placement of the points is not important. on the Options Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. click (Modify Sub-Elements). (Add points). click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. Next. You modify the points individually. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 .

specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. for the dimension. click (Modify Sub-Elements).24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and press ENTER. enter -2''. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. 25 Using the same method. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape.

click (Properties). and select all of the roof edges. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. enter 4''. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . 29 On the Design Bar. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. for Elevation. and on the Options Bar. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. including the interior edges of the roof regions. and press ENTER. click Modify. 31 Select the roof slab.27 Press and hold CTRL.

38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. and soffits. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. In some cases this type of slope is desired. Gutters. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. 36 View the results in the section view. By making the insulation layer variable. click Save As. on the File menu. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Creating Fascia. gutters. for Structure. under Construction. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and Soffits In this lesson. 35 Click OK 3 times. gutters. for the Thermal/Air Layer. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Creating Fascia. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. Gutters. click Edit. and soffits in Revit Architecture. The entire slab is sloped. select Variable. you can easily create its fascia. After you create a roof. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 37 If you want to save your changes. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. and Soffits on page 586. you learn how to create roof fascia.

1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 5 On the Options Bar. click (Properties). and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Name dialog.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. click Training Files. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Common\c_Condominium. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. and click Open. and click OK. 3 Press CTRL. click Duplicate. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. under Construction. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove.rfa. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. and click OK twice. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Built-up Fascia.

Creating Gutters on page 588. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Gutters In this exercise. 2 On the Options Bar.rvt. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. click (Properties). c_Condominium. 13 On the Design Bar. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model.

12 Proceed to the next exercise. click Edit/New. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. . 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. click Duplicate. Creating Soffits on page 590. Creating Gutters | 589 . 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. and click OK three times. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. click in the Value field for Material. under Construction. and click OK. 10 Click to place the gutter.3 In the Properties dialog. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 Under Materials and Finishes.

You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Roof. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit.Creating Soffits In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. c_Condominium. click Pick Roofs. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you learn how to place a roof soffit. expand Floor Plans. expand Views.

8 Select the roof. click Join Geometry. and double-click 3D. 5 On the Design Bar. and then select the soffit to join them. Creating Soffits | 591 . Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 7 On the Tools menu. expand Views (all).4 Select the roof. click Finish Sketch. 6 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views.

9 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Save As.

you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. In the final exercise. click Training Files. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. under Length. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. 3 Under Area. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. select Millimeters. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. Finally. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. your values will be different.rvt. click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. For Unit Suffix. click Project Units. 593 . and open Common\c_Area. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. If you are using metric units. select mm. 2 In the Project Units dialog. select Square meters. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. Click OK. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area.

select m2. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. For Unit Suffix. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. click OK. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. click Settings. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. and click Room and Area. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . it is not necessary in this exercise. 9 Click Cancel. Click OK. or 0.■ ■ ■ For Rounding. These schemes define spatial relationships. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). 4 In the Project Units dialog. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. click the Area Schemes tab. right-click in the Design Bar. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. the system-computed height defaults to the level. select 2 decimal places. click the Room Calculations tab. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. expand Floor Plans.

NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). 13 In the Project Browser. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. 12 When the informational dialog displays. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. rather than the area tag. If you select No. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. click Area. click Area Plan.Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . Click OK. To modify the area. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. you must manually add these boundary lines. forming a closed loop. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. you must select one of the reference lines. When you select Yes in this dialog. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. under Views (all). An area is represented by two crossed reference lines.

and store area. When you add area boundary lines. If you do not select this option. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. you create a new area plan for rentable space. When you pick the walls. click Area Plan. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. click Area Boundary. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. Next. Click OK. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. 21 On the Options Bar. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . common areas. you can either draw them or pick them. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type.

click Modify. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 . 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 On the Design Bar. click ■ ■ . click Area.23 On the Design Bar. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. Select Office area for Area Type. and click to select the area. 27 On the Options Bar. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag.

Select Office area for Area Type. Click OK. In the Element Properties dialog. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. click ■ ■ ■ . 32 On the Options Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. 31 On the Design Bar.■ Click OK. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. click Modify and select the area. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. click Area.

■ Click OK. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. and select Store Area for Area Type. enter Core for Name. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. 35 Add an area to the building model core. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. and Tenant 4 in the lower right.

you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule.rvt. In the next exercise. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. and click to place the legend. click Save. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. click Color Scheme Legend. and click Save. In this exercise. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. name the project Area-in progress. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type.Notice that within the two store areas. 37 On the File menu. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model.

8 Add the fields Area and Name. under Category. click the Fields tab. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. 7 Under Available fields. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Areas (Rentable). and click OK. click Schedule/Quantities. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes.3 When the dialog displays. select Area Type and click Add. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 .

602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.9 Click OK.

curtain systems. In this tutorial. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. and perimeter information. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. or both. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. If you modify a massing face. and roofs. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. and floors. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. floors. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. building elements. 603 . roofs. After you make building elements. you then need to update the building face. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. volume. floor. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. At any time. you can specify the view to display massing elements. After creating mass floors. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. You assign the default wall. Using Massing Tools In this lesson.

under Floor Plans. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing . right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. and click Massing. 5 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and cutting geometry. sweeps.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog.rvt. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. click Create Mass. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. under Views (all).

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. (Pick Lines). and click OK. under Floor Plans. click (Default 3D View). 16 On the Design Bar. click 18 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). for Name. enter 25000. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. under Constraints. and click OK. click Lines. click Finish Sketch. and click . click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. (Line). click the value for Material. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. enter 1550 mm. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. click Lines. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. 8 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. 12 On the Design Bar. for Extrusion End. for Offset. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Extrusion Properties. 13 On the View toolbar. select Mass (Opaque). 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. and on the Options Bar. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. 10 In the Materials dialog. 15 On the View Control Bar. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. under Materials and Finishes. and on the Options Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 .

606 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Views (all). click the value for Material. and click OK. select Pick a plane. TIP If necessary. 25 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). for Name.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. double-click West. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click OK. for Extrusion End. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. click Finish Sketch. highlight the larger form. for Extrusion Start. enter 27500. double-click {3D} to see the results. select Mass (Transparent). 23 In the Materials dialog. 28 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). under Materials and Finishes. 21 On the Design Bar. enter 25000. click Extrusion Properties. and click . The second form is on top of the first form. press TAB to highlight the entire face. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. 30 In the drawing area.

36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. Next. and clear Chain. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. and on the Options Bar. click (Draw). click (Arc passing through three points). 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 .31 Click to select the face. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. 37 On the Options Bar. 34 On the Options Bar. and click to select the line start point. click Lines. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. (Pick Lines).

42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. click Modify. on the Options Bar. 41 On the Edit toolbar. and delete the vertical construction line. 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. click Edit Top. 46 On the Design Bar. 39 On the Design Bar. click Lines and. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. (Line). click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. click the arrow next to the drawing options. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click (Move). and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. under Views (all). double-click East.TIP If you do not see this option. 45 In the Project Browser.

Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . click 49 Create an arc as shown. 53 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). for Material. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. (Arc passing through three points). 51 In the Element Properties dialog. In this exercise. click Blend Properties. click Finish Sketch. In the next exercise. and that -92000 is specified for Second End. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. 52 On the Design Bar. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model.48 On the Options Bar. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. 50 On the Design Bar. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. and click OK.

under Floor Plans. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. 10 On the Options Bar. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. as shown. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Using the same technique. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . select the mass. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. m_Massing_Start. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. 1 In the Project Browser.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. 4 On the Options bar. click Lines. under Views (all). place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. click Ref Plane. click (Line). and select Chain.rvt. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. double-click Level 1. 2 In the drawing area. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. 9 On the Design Bar. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar.

Using Swept Blends | 611 . you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. In this exercise. enter 0. snap the corners to the intersections. 17 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Design Bar. When sketching each extrusion.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. for Extrusion End. click Finish Sketch. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. click Extrusion Properties. 15 Click OK. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. 16 On the Design Bar. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. 14 Under Constraints. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. on the View Control Bar. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. click (Default 3D View).

■ For the radius. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click Lines. double-click Level 1. click Sketch 2D Path. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points).rvt. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. m_Massing_Start. select a point below the mass elements. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser.

click Finish Path. click Profile 1. click (Default 3D View). as shown. click Lines. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. 10 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. The only way to align these elements is visually. Using Swept Blends | 613 . click (Rectangle). 8 On the Design Bar. and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. verify that <By Sketch> is selected. 6 On the Design Bar. and click Edit. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. 9 On the Options Bar.

(The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. 17 Using the same method. click Profile 2. 15 On the Design Bar.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. and press ESC.13 On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Profile. click (Align). and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar.

Using Swept Blends | 615 . under Materials and Finishes. click Swept Blend Properties. 22 Click OK twice.18 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Materials dialog. select Mass (Transparent). Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. click Finish Swept Blend. click Finish Profile. 23 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and click . click <By Category>.

you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. click Finish Mass. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise.24 On the Design Bar. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete.rvt. you create new family types from a mass family file. In this exercise. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Finally. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements.

and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. click Family Types. under Other.rfa. and click Apply. 2 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. for Height. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Height. click Training Files. for Width. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. In this exercise. click New. for Depth. enter 9000 mm.rfa. and click Apply. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . 7 Click New. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 4 In the Family Types dialog. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. and click OK. enter 15000mm. for Height. and for Name. and click OK. enter 6000 mm. enter 46000mm. and for Name. 5 Click New. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. enter 18000 mm. for Depth. 9 Click OK. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. enter 18000 mm. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. enter 12000 mm. and click Apply. 3 In the Name dialog. enter 11000 mm. 8 For Width. for Depth. enter 68000 mm. 6 For Width.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 1 If not already selected. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. 8 In the Type Selector. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Semi Barrel Vault. under Views (all). on the View toolbar. click Training Files. Arc Dome. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. 6 Open the Box-Training. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. and Triangle. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family.rfa. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing .Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise.rfa family files. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Site. 2 In the Project Browser.rvt. You also load other existing mass families and place them. click Place Mass.rfa. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. click Training Files.rfa. 3 On the View Control Bar. as shown.

16 On the Design Bar. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. as shown. enter 90 for Angle. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. for the Material parameter. 23 On the Options Bar. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. and click OK twice. 21 On the Options Bar. specify Mass (Opaque). 14 In the Type Selector. select the triangle. select the 3 boxes. click Modify.10 On the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties). 20 In the Type Selector. click Place Mass. 11 Select the box. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. specify Mass (Transparent). Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . and click to place the mass. select Rotate after placement. 24 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. click (Element Properties). click Place Mass. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. 17 Press CTRL. 25 In the drawing area. click Modify. for the Material parameter. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK twice.

620 | Chapter 17 Massing . 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 29 In the Type Selector. for the Material parameter. click (Default 3D View). click Place Mass. and click OK twice. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. specify Mass (Opaque).26 Select the triangle. and click (Element Properties). 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK twice. specify Mass (Transparent). 33 On the View toolbar. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. for the Material parameter.

Joining Mass Elements | 621 . Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. In the next exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. In this exercise.rvt file. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. NOTE When you join geometry. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. you join these mass elements. (Join Geometry). click (Default 3D View). Joining Mass Elements In this exercise.

double-click Site. under Floor Plans.3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . 4 Select the triangle. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. on the Edit toolbar. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. under Views (all). click (Mirror).

as shown. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box.8 On the Options Bar. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. click (Draw). and snap to the midpoint of the edge. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. for Axis. 17 Press ESC to see the result. (Join Geometry). click 14 On the Tools toolbar. Joining Mass Elements | 623 . click (Default 3D View). 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. enter SM. and then select the triangle. 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection.

do not clear the check mark. (If Design Options is already selected. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . and select the triangle mass element.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. 2 On the Window menu. click (Add to Design Option Set). Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. click Modify. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options.In this exercise. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. 1 On the Design Bar. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. you joined mass elements together. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model.rvt.

enter 90. click Place Mass. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. under Views (all). select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. and click OK twice. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. and click OK. 17 In the Type Selector. click Place Mass. 13 On the Design Bar. select Sloped (primary). 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. double-click Site. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. 10 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. for Angle. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . select Rotate after placement. 8 On the Options Bar. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. specify Mass (Transparent). TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. for the Material parameter. clear Curved. 14 In the drawing area. and click (Element Properties). click Modify. 7 In the Type Selector. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 23 On the View Control Bar. and click OK twice. 28 In the Project Browser. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. click Modify. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. 22 In the Project Browser. TIP To find the correct shapes. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . select the three arc domes.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. and watch the status bar. specify Mass (Transparent). and click (Element Properties). for the Material parameter. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. under Views (all). 20 In the drawing area. click (Add to Design Option Set). clear Sloped. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. under Elevations. double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. 19 On the Design Bar. select Curved. double-click North. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. under Views (all). and click OK. While pressing CTRL.

You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click the Design Options tab. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. 31 Click the value for Design Option. In this exercise. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . 34 Close the warning that displays. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. click (Design Options). and click OK. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options.rvt. select Curved from the Design Option menu. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. click Make Primary. you placed mass elements into Design Options. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you can make it the primary option. 35 On the File menu. under Option. select Curved and. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. and click Close. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option.

1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. 5 In the Type Selector.Brick on CMU. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. double-click {3D}. click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. 6 On the Options Bar. click Wall by Face. select Basic Wall: Exterior . 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. select Wall Centerline. you pick massing faces to create walls. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . click (Pick Faces). and for Loc Line.rvt. 2 On the View toolbar.

under Floor Plans. 14 In the Project Browser. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. 9 On the Design Bar. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. double-click Level 3. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 16 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. under Views (all). click Wall by Face. 12 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. under Views (all). double-click Level 5. click Wall by Face.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. double-click Level 1. 8 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Project Browser.

double-click Level 9. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. click Wall by Face. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. If desired. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. 20 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Project Browser.18 Select all the faces shown in red. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. under Views (all). 630 | Chapter 17 Massing .

you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 8 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser.In this exercise. perimeter. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 3 On the Model Categories tab. under Views (all). click Mass Floors. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. and exterior surface area. volume. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. clear Curtain Panels.rvt. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . double-click {3D}. select all levels. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. and Walls. click Modify. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. 4 Click OK. 6 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. When you select levels. Curtain Systems. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls.

12 In the Mass Floors dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. click Mass Floors. click Modify. select Levels 1-4. and click OK. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. 13 On the Design Bar. 10 Press CTRL.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing .

17 In the Mass Floors dialog. click Mass Floors. and click OK. The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. 16 On the Options Bar. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . 15 Press CTRL. select Level 1. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view.14 On the Options Bar.

and select Level. under Category. Floor Perimeter. select Mass Floor. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Floor Volume.In this exercise. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. schedules can be created using the mass floors. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . select Floor Area. and click Add. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). under Available fields. press and hold SHIFT. 4 Using the same method. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. The Floor Area. and click OK.rvt. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.

Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. enter Retail.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. The Mass Floor Schedule displays. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. select Mass: Family and Type. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . and click OK. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. for Sort by. for Usage.

the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. After you assign usage. click Edit. under Other. expand Schedules/Quantities. click Move Up until Usage is listed first. select Mass: Family and Type. 14 Select Level. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. and click Properties. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click Remove. under Scheduled fields (in order). for Fields. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 13 With Usage selected.

under Fields. for Filter. and plan views. for Sort by. 19 Click OK twice. select Level. and click OK. select Usage. and click OK. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 27 Click OK twice. under Other. for Field formatting. click Edit. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. select Calculate totals. and click Rename. for Then by. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. and in the field below. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. 18 On the Filter tab. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . 22 In the Project Browser. elevation. and select Grand totals. select Usage. under Other. 16 On the Formatting tab. for Filter. for Filter by. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. select Floor Area. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. and click Properties. enter Hotel. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. click Edit. 23 In the Rename View dialog. in the field under Filter by. 24 In the Project Browser.

The mass floor schedules list. you created mass floor schedules. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. floor perimeter. you pick massing faces to create roofs. under Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. the floor area. click Roof by Face.In this exercise. by level. double-click {3D}.

5 On the Options Bar. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. select Basic Roof : Generic . This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. click Create Roof.400mm. click Create Roof.4 In the Type Selector. Your model should now look as shown. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 .

Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. in the Type Selector. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. and Walls. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Create Roof. and click OK. Curtain Systems. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. select Curtain Panels. In this exercise. select Sloped Glazing. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. 13 Using the same method. 12 On the Options Bar.8 Using the method you just learned. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces.

verify that Select Multiple is selected. 5 Press CTRL. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 . click Curtain System by Face. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. double-click {3D}. 6 On the Options Bar. click Create System.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.rvt. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. under Views (all).

select the blended form on the in-place mass. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing . create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected.7 Using the same method.

create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). Creating Curtain Systems | 643 . click Create System. 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.9 On the Options Bar. 11 Using the same method.

and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family.rvt. In this exercise. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing .12 Click Modify to exit the command. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. you change the size of an existing mass family.

2 On the View menu. Curtain Systems. double-click Site.1 In the Project Browser. clear Exclude Design Options. and click (Element Properties). click Visibility/Graphics. Next. click Modify. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. for Width. under Floor Plans. 7 On the Options Bar. Roofs. under Views (all). and Walls. and click OK. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . Floors. 6 On the Design Bar. clear Curtain Panels. and then click OK. enter 30000. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown.

12 On the View Control Bar. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). double-click Level 1. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. 11 In the Project Browser. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing .10 Open the 3D view to see the result. In the next steps.

click Remake. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. 16 On the View toolbar. Also. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 .TIP To select the curtain wall. click (Default 3D View). 17 Select the roof as shown. click OK. 14 On the Options Bar. you want to select the smaller one.

648 | Chapter 17 Massing .18 On the Options Bar. and click Remake. 19 Select the arc dome curtain system. click Remake.

In this exercise. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. you changed the size of an existing mass family. 1 Open the 3D view. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar.20 In the Project Browser. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise.rvt. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. under Schedules/Quantities.

under 3D Views. click All to select all categories. 3 In the Project Browser. right-click {3D}. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 6 On the Model Categories tab. and click OK. 9 Select Mass. 4 Rename the view 3D .The 3D view now shows only the building shell.Massing only. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing.

such as columns and an extruded roof. to the building shell.In this exercise. If desired. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. You might create the model shown. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 . This concludes the massing tutorial. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model.

652 .

you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. you add the new model group to a previously created group. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. Modifying. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. and modify repetitive units. the host group is also updated automatically. In another exercise. hotel rooms. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. or with those working on a different project. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. For example. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. you not only simplify their placement. and typical office layouts. You can also nest groups within other groups. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. The new group is considered nested within the host group. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. In this tutorial. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. After you create a model group. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. By grouping objects. In this exercise. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. You mirror one instance of the group. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. you also simplify the modification process. Creating. 653 . you create a model group for a typical kitchen. When you make changes to a nested group. all instances in the building model are updated. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. place.

rvt. expand Views (all). enter ZR. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. click Training Files.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. 2 Click in the drawing area. and double-click First Floor. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . expand Floor Plans.

click (Group). and click OK. enter Typical Kitchen.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 4 On the Edit toolbar. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog.

656 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. select the center control for the group origin.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.

Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. and click Create Instance. under Groups. click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. expand Model. right-click Typical Kitchen. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance.

16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 15 On the Options Bar. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. click (Mirror).14 On the Edit toolbar. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping . clear Copy.

18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. and on the Edit toolbar. click (Rotate). Creating and Placing a Group | 659 . 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell.

as shown. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. 20 On the Design Bar. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Modify. and one rotated. one mirrored. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping .NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images.

Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. Modifying a Group | 661 . Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. you make changes to an instance of a group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. Modifying a Group In this exercise. When you finish editing. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. and click Save. click Save As. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. and click to select it. press TAB to highlight the wall.

). press TAB. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 4 Move the cursor over the door. select the element. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance.).). NOTE To display an excluded element.3 Click (Group Member. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click to select the wall. press TAB. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall.). click Modify. 7 Click (Group Member. and click to select the door. 8 On the Design Bar. and click member to group instance.

127mm. Modifying a Group | 663 .Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. select Basic Wall : Generic . click Door. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. 15 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. move the cursor to the left. click Wall. clear Tag on Placement. 10 In the Type Selector. 14 In the Type Selector. 13 On the Design Bar. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm.

select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 23 In the drawing area. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor up. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening.17 On the Design Bar. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. 21 On the Options Bar. All other elements in the model are grayed out. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. In edit group mode. click Modify. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. click Edit Group.

click 28 For Base Offset. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. 29 On the group editor toolbar. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. which acts as the host. 26 Select the opening. click Modify. and the wall and folding doors for the closet.25 On the Design Bar. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. you add the Typical Kitchen group. and on the Options Bar. created in an earlier lesson. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. for Unconnected Height. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. Nesting Groups | 665 . under Constraints. Nesting Groups In this exercise. enter 1000. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. (Element Properties). enter 2134. click Finish. and click OK.

select the Typical Kitchen group. in the Project Browser. 5 In the drawing area.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. 4 On the group editor toolbar. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. double-click First Floor. click (Add to Group). 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Edit Group. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan.rvt.

7 On the group editor toolbar. double-click Second Floor. click Finish. select the wall between the folding doors. and each of the bifold doors. under Floor Plans. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. Nesting Groups | 667 . Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group.6 Press TAB. 8 In the Project Browser.

You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. such as text. under Floor Plans. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. you add door tags to a group. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and filled regions. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. such as door and window tags. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. double-click First Floor.

A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . click Finish Sketch.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Filled Region. and select a point below the left elevator. click to draw a rectangular region.

14 On the Edit toolbar. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. and click OK. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. click (Group). 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 12 Enter Tile. 9 On the Options Bar. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. and select the text note and the filled region.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. click Modify. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. click to add an arc leader. click Text. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. as shown. 16 In the drawing area. and on the Design Bar.

you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Modify. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. expand Detail. under Floor Plans. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Project Browser. Because the detail group contains variables.18 On the Design Bar. double-click Second Floor. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. 22 On the Design Bar. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . and click Create Instance. 21 In the drawing area. under Groups. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.

draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags.manner that a drawing component can be added. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. under Floor Plans. click Tag ➤ By Category. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. double-click First Floor. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. as shown. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . clear Leader.

expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. select Door Tags. and click OK. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. double-click Second Floor. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. and click OK.7 On the Options Bar. Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . click Check None. click (Group). for Attached Detail Group Name. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. click (Filter Selection). 8 In the Filter dialog. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Edit toolbar.

you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. 16 On the Design Bar. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 14 On the Options Bar. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. therefore. click Place Detail. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. When you load the group from the library into a new project. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and click OK. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. click Modify.

5 In the New Project dialog. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance.rvt. for Create new. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. verify that Project is selected. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. click OK. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. expand Groups. and click OK. 12 On the Design Bar. and click Save. verify that Same as group name is selected. click Modify.rvt. accept the default template file.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). click Desktop. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. 3 For File name. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. A warning dialog displays. and click Open. and click Create Instance. and click Save Group. In this case. and expand Model. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. select 2 Bedroom Unit. under Groups\Model. browse to the Desktop. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog.

click Use Existing. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. click Bind. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. click Modify.rvt file is added as a link to the project. 17 On the Design Bar. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click OK. and on the Options Bar. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Link. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 23 In the confirmation dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. When a group is converted to a link. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. click Remove Link. 24 In the message dialog. verify that Attached Details is selected only. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. expand Revit Links. and the link is removed. select the linked Revit model.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping .rvt. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. click Training Files.

Using Site Tools In this lesson. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface.Site 19 In this tutorial. You add property lines manually. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. islands. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. and then modify the data. and walkways. In the final exercises. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. 677 . convert the data to a table. you add a building pad to the site.

Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. click Training Files. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm.rvt. and double-click Site.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. and open Metric\m_First_Project. expand Views (all). The scale of this view is 1 : 100. click Point. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. click Toposurface. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. right-click in the Design Bar. In the second part of this exercise. 678 | Chapter 19 Site . TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. and click Site. This project file was created using the default metric template. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. 4 On the Options Bar. Using the first method. you create a toposurface using two different methods. 3 On the Design Bar.

5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. Use the following illustration as a reference. Creating a Toposurface | 679 . A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide.

12 On the Settings menu. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. click Finish Surface.8 On the Options Bar. click Site Settings. Use the following illustration as a reference. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. 11 On the Design Bar. under Increment. 15000mm. under Additional Contours. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. and 18000mm absolute elevations. 12000mm. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . and click OK. enter 1500mm.

This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. click to delete it. click (Default 3D View). 15 On the View Control Bar. Before importing the contour data. modify the level names and elevations. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Creating a Toposurface | 681 . (SteeringWheels). under Views (all). click to view it at various angles. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. 18 In the Project Browser. and double-click South. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click the elevation value. 14 On the View toolbar. on the Standard toolbar. enter 1000mm. 16 On the View toolbar.

under Views (all). select Specify. it is considered an import symbol. click Modify. click Pin Position. 24 In the Project Browser. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. 28 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. For Layers. Click Open. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Yes. 29 Select the imported topography. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . For Colors. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. double-click Site. 30 On the Edit menu. Until it is exploded. under Floor Plans.21 Click the Level 2 text. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. and click OK. select Preserve. rename the level Basement. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. 23 Click the Level 1 text. click Training Files. Verify that Current view only is not selected. rename the level Base Site Elevation. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.

select it. clear Elevations. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. click Toposurface. click Visibility/Graphics. click Modify. and then click OK. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. 34 Under Visibility. When you select the import symbol. 32 On the View menu. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 36 On the Design Bar. click the Annotation Categories tab. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. when the edges highlight. clear C_INDX.31 On the Design Bar. Creating a Toposurface | 683 .

click (Default 3D View). you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. you add property lines using two methods. 39 On the Design Bar. 40 On the View toolbar.rvt. click (SteeringWheels). Adding Property Lines on page 684. Using the first method. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. name the project Site-in progress. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. click Finish Surface. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. 42 On the View toolbar. Using the second method. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Save.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor.

rvt. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. do so before continuing. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. Site-in progress. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Click Modify. click Property Line. Adding Property Lines | 685 . click Lines. select Create property lines by sketching. If you have not completed the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. Select and delete the right vertical line. and click OK. On the Design Bar.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. 4 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. double-click Site. click Lines. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar.

click Property Line. 9 In the warning dialog. to delete them. when they highlight. 6 On the Design Bar. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. click OK. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. 8 On the Options Bar.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. add an arc line on the right. A warning dialog is displayed. and click OK. click 12 On the Design Bar. select the lines. click OK. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. on the Standard toolbar. select Edit Table. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. click Finish Sketch. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. 686 | Chapter 19 Site .

19 In the Tags dialog. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. Adding Property Lines | 687 . 16 Click OK. If the gap is not closed. This means there is no gap in the property lines. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. click to place the property lines. 15 Starting in Row #1. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor.14 In the Property Lines dialog. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed.

click to place it. 30 On the View Control Bar. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Before adding property line segment tags. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. In the next exercise. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. and click Drafting.dwg and click OK.rfa. 27 On the Options Bar. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . 23 On the View menu. In this exercise. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. clear Leader. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. the original DWG file remains visible in the view.20 Click Load. The tags display more prominently in this view. click Training Files. and click OK. In the final step. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. you created two sets of property lines. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. right-click in the Design Bar. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. click the Imported Categories tab. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 25 Under Visibility. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. click Visibility/Graphics. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. 22 In the Tags dialog.

4 Under Modify Subcategories. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. select Working Contour. select Dash dot. under Contour Line Display. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. Under Line Pattern. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. and click OK. select Topography. select Single Value. click New. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu.rvt. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography.0mm. select a shade of Brown. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. 7 Click OK. In the Object Styles dialog. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. click Site Settings. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Object Styles. enter the name Working Contour. Site-in progress. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Under Range Type. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . 10 Under Additional Contours. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. Under Subcategory. Under Line Color. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. for Subcategory. 2 On the Settings menu. enter 1000.

In the next exercise. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. The next exercise requires a new training file. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. parking areas. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. Working Contour. and islands. The object style subcategory. you create subregions in order to define roads. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. parking areas. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. such as material.11 Click OK. you create topographic subregions to define roads. and islands. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. click Subregion. 2 On the Design Bar. click Lines. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. try to replicate the location and proportion.rvt. Although the exact dimensions are not important.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Site. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 .

7 In the Element Properties dialog. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data. and click OK. 8 On the Design Bar. enter Parking for Name. click the value for Material. When you finish the sketch in a later step. 6 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. and click to open the Materials dialog. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. select Site .Tarmacadam for Name. click Properties. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.NOTE In the Metric training file. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. and click OK. click Finish Sketch.

13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. they display within this schedule. 14 On the Options Bar. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . under Floor Plans.Tarmacadam. 12 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. expand Schedules/Quantities. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . double-click Site. and double-click Topography Schedule. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. As you create new subregions. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. click Edit Boundary. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.9 On the View Control Bar. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. double-click Site. In this training project. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . under Floor Plans. click Finish Sketch. 16 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. Delete overlapping lines. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Topography Schedule. Within each subregion. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. 20 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the project area has increased. click Lines. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. 17 On the View Control Bar. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. click Subregion.

28 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. select Site . Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. under Identity Data. under Schedules/Quantities.23 In the upper-right parking area. double-click Topography Schedule. click Properties. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. and click OK. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click the value for Material.Grass for Name. 30 In the Project Browser. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. and click to open the Materials dialog. Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 .Grass for Name. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 On the Design Bar. 29 On the View Control Bar. enter Island . under Materials and Finishes. 26 In the Materials dialog.

and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . 32 In the Project Browser. Name each region Island Grass.31 In the Project Browser. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. Notice that the schedule has been updated. Name the subregion Walkway. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Site. click Subregion. and apply the material Site . 34 On the Design Bar. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. double-click Site. double-click Topography Schedule. You must sketch each region separately. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . 35 On the Design Bar. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser.Grass.walkway. click Lines.

you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. 37 On the Design Bar. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. Notice that the schedule has been updated. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. under Schedules/Quantities. click Finish Sketch. 38 In the Project Browser. there is still only one toposurface. double-click Topography Schedule.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect.

rvt. 2 Select the toposurface. this project file is required in its current state. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. name the project Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. and click Save. Site tutorial-in progress.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. When you use the grading tool.

see the tutorial. click Modify. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. 6 On the Design Bar. and click OK. under Phasing. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. A warning dialog is displayed. 8 Select the topographic surface. 5 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Graded Region dialog.3 On the Options Bar. select Copy Internal Points. select Existing for Phase Created. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . click Graded Region. click (Element Properties). Using Phasing on page 761. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. and click Select and Edit. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.

Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. 10 Press DELETE. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. 700 | Chapter 19 Site .

and new. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. demolished. Grading the Toposurface | 701 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 11 On the View Control Bar.Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing.

click (Default 3D View). specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. click Point. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. 702 | Chapter 19 Site . 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 17 On the Design Bar. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 18 On the View toolbar.13 Press DELETE. click Finish Surface. 19 On the View Control Bar.

and delete it. Therefore. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify.20 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. specify Existing for Phase. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. and click OK. 23 Select the toposurface. 24 On the View menu. under Phasing. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. you create a building pad. you can delete it. and click OK. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click to view it at various angles. click View Properties. Only the graded topography displays. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. When you add a building pad. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. specify New Construction for Phase. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. only the original toposurface displays. this project file is required in its current state. under Phasing. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. (SteeringWheels). 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click View Properties.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Finish Sketch. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Pad. Site tutorial-in progress.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the View Control Bar. the Pick Walls command is active. click Lines. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. NOTE By default. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. double-click Site.rvt. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. If you have an existing building model. 704 | Chapter 19 Site .

9 On the View toolbar. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. 7 On the View Control Bar. this project file is required in its current state. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 8 On the View toolbar. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. click (Default 3D View). click (SteeringWheels). Adding Site Components on page 706. Notice the new building pad. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click Site. you add parking and planting components to the site surface.90 deg.Adding Site Components In this exercise. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . Site tutorial-in progress. 706 | Chapter 19 Site . 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. and select the parking space. click Parking Component. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area.rvt.

NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. 8 On the View toolbar. Adding Site Components | 707 . click (Default 3D View). 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task.

and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 708 | Chapter 19 Site . 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Site Component. under Floor Plans. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. choose any tree type. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. click (SteeringWheels).9 On the View toolbar. 12 In the Type Selector. double-click Site. Notice the new parking spaces.

the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. In the following illustration. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 14 On the View toolbar. 15 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. Adding Site Components | 709 . 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click (SteeringWheels).

select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Tag All Not Tagged. under Floor Plans. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. and click OK. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. click Apply.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points.rvt. click Hidden Line. 5 On the View menu. double-click Site. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. and click Apply. this project file is required in its current state. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. Site tutorial-in progress.

NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. In the following exercise. as shown: 10 Using the same method. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. to position the shoulder of the leader. outside of the site. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. Click again to the left to position the leader. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. 8 On the Options Bar. Click up and to the left. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation.

■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. 712 | Chapter 19 Site . click Modify. 11 On the Design Bar. 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. 12 Press and hold CTRL. and select the 3 spot dimensions.

Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . this project file is required in its current state. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.■ Clear Leader. click Modify. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. 14 On the Design Bar. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. you create a parking schedule. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial.

The parking schedule is displayed. and click Add. 6 Click the Formatting tab. Site tutorial-in progress. 12 In the Site plan. and under Heading.rvt. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 4 Under Available fields. click Close Hidden Windows. 5 Under Available fields. under Views (all). select Type. under Space. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. double-click Site. 9 On the Window menu. enter Size. If necessary. 8 Under Fields. number the first three spaces consecutively. and under Heading. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and click Add. select Parking for Category. under Floor Plans.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 13 In the Parking Schedule. click the Fields tab. click Tile. select Mark. enter Space. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. select Type. 7 Under Fields. 11 On the Window menu. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. 10 In the Project Browser. select Mark.

Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. This allows you to know which space you are numbering.Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. 14 In the Parking Schedule. finish numbering the remaining spaces. under Space. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 .

716 .

you specify an active workset. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. A workset is a collection of building elements. The first time you activate worksets within a project. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. and so on. such as walls. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. go to the Worksets dialog. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. select the desired workset. All other team members can view this workset. they cannot make changes to it. stairs. you can select which worksets are open or closed. and click Editable. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 . you must first enable Worksharing. doors. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. In this tutorial. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. Using Worksharing.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. use Element Borrowing. however. floors. such as annotations and dimensions. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. Elements specific to a view. After the project is shared. Working in a shared project In a shared project. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. To make a workset editable. called Worksharing. You can enable Worksharing for any project. When you are working on a shared project. This prevents possible conflicts within the project.

You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. In a multi-story structure. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. In the lessons and exercises that follow. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. such as a tenant interior. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . You should have at least one workset for each person. In most projects. When setting up Worksharing. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios.dialog. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. Shared Levels and Grids. In the next exercise. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. Instead. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. After learning the fundamentals. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. not including the Project Standards. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. and View worksets. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. for a typical project. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. Experience has shown that.

Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. When creating the new worksets. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. each team member has control over a portion of the design. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. Regardless of the default setting. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. if a workset named Interior was created. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. For example. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. When you create a new workset. On this tab. As new members create worksets for their own use. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. with each assigned a specific functional task. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. designers work in teams. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 .Team member roles Typically. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project.

This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. within the local file. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. Therefore. you make that workset editable by you. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. your changes are saved. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. however. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. your changes propagate to the entire team. the file is saved as the central file. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. This makes them available to other team members. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. When you save to the central file. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. This is called “Selective Open. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. you can select which workset is active. proceeds as usual. After saving to the central file. When finished or at regular intervals.Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. you should then save to your local file. However. On the Options Bar. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. When you save locally (to your local file).” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. When you save to the central file. Generally. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . As you work. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest.

In the next exercise. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. In this instance. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. if you know who checked out the required workset. you work no differently then you would in the office. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. you should check out the Materials workset. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. for instance. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. In this situation. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. Alternatively. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. and then save the local file. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. and make that workset editable. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. When working remotely. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. In this conceptual exercise. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. make any required worksets editable. To do this. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. using VPN. save to the central file. reload the latest changes from the central file. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file.

When you enable worksharing. Your username displays as the present owner. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names.rvt. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. The Worksets dialog displays. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . under Show. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. 3 In the Worksets dialog. click Worksets. and open Common\c_Worksets. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. click Training Files. and notice all are editable by you.Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you enable Worksharing within an existing project." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

and click OK. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. expand Views (all). imagine four users including yourself. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. For example. For training purposes. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser.■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. it is better to make them visible by default. under Identity Data. When you initially activate Worksharing. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. click New. 8 Click OK. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. Because the interior walls appear in many views. 17 On the Options Bar. type the name Exterior Shell. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. currently named Workset1. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. clear Visible by default in all views. In this training file. 14 In the Worksets dialog. Only User-Created worksets should display. a small number of team members are working on the building model. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. Project Standards. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. 12 Click Rename. clear Families. another is assigned the interior layout. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. In this case. 13 In the Rename dialog. 11 In the Worksets dialog. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. 16 In the drawing area. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. Therefore. however. and double-click Level 1. ■ 5 Under Show. select Workset1. click . you can rename the default workset. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. expand Floor Plans. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. In this simple training project. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. click OK. and Views. 9 Click New. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. You do.

26 On the View menu. under Identity Data. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. select Interior Layout for Workset. and click OK. 24 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. click the Worksets tab. 20 Select one of the interior walls. select Interior Layout for Workset. stairs. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 23 Select all of the interior elements. 29 Click OK. Hold Shift down to deselect an element.19 Click OK. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. click . click . and walls. including the interior doors. under Identity Data.

created new worksets to accommodate each team member. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. click . select all of the interior elements of the building model. Now that you have created the central file. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. 35 On the Options Bar. 42 On the right side of the dialog. click Non Editable. select Interior Layout for Workset. click Worksets. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. 38 In the Save As dialog. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. and click OK. In this exercise.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. 43 Click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. under Floor Plans. 41 In the Worksets dialog. you enabled Worksharing on a project. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. double-click Level 2. 34 In the drawing area. under Views (all). If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. 30 On the View menu. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. If any interior elements remain. 32 Select Interior Layout. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. make sure you remember the location of this central file. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. 33 In the Project Browser. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. 39 Click Save. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Close. click Save As. 44 On the File menu. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. and click OK. click the Worksets tab. under Identity Data.

Next. click Save As. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. You have created a local file which is for your use only. and click Save. If you have not yet completed the exercise. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. select all the User-Created worksets. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. 12 Click OK. 15 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Open.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. make modifications to the building model. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. select Interior Layout for Name. click Worksets. select Interior Layout. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. you create your local file. In this case. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. expand Floor Plans. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 2 In the Open dialog. and select Specify. 13 On the Window menu. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. select the central file. and click OK. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. In addition. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. Before working on the model. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. please do so before continuing. click Options. click Open. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. and double-click Level 1. expand Views (all). 6 On the File menu. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. and select Yes for Editable. check out worksets. 11 In the Worksets dialog. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 7 In the Save As dialog. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and click OK. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects .

18 On the Options Bar. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. click Modify. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. 22 Click OK. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. If this is selected.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 23 On the File menu. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. In the Worksets dialog. click Worksets. notice the Editable Only option. and click OK. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. 24 Click OK. you can still edit this wall. Verify that it is cleared. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. under Identity Data. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. In this case. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. click . 20 Under Constraints. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. click . 21 On the Options Bar. On the Options Bar. however. Because this element is not owned by another user. If it was owned by another user.

728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 34 In the Type Selector. click Wall. click Modify. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. The precise location is not important. click Door. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 31 On the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Interior . add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 26 Delete the door. 29 In the Type Selector.126mm Partition (2-hr).Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor.

Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. it is recommended. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. At the end of a work session. When working in your local file. You modified the building model. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. you should relinquish all worksets. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. and save locally immediately afterward. If you have not yet completed these exercises. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Borrowed Elements is selected. and reload the latest changes. In this particular case. checked out worksets. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. make elements editable. click Save to Central. add two door openings into the rooms you created. Whenever you save. For training purposes. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. leave this file open in its current state. which matches the information in the Status Bar. you created your local file. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . each user must check out worksets. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. two users access the central file through a network connection.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. displays the workset as well as the element type. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. you should perform regular saves. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. In addition. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. In this exercise. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. Throughout the process. save to central. a tooltip. By default. please do so before continuing.

WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. and select Yes for Editable. In addition. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 4 Click the General Tab and. 3 On the Settings menu. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. one user has already created a local file. This is a system setting. consider that person to be User 1. click Options. 9 Click Open. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. and proceed to Creating a local copy. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. select all the User-Created worksets. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). and reset the Username to your computer login name. 12 In the Save As dialog. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. click Options. This file is for your use only. 15 On the File menu. and click Save. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. For training purposes. return to the Settings dialog. click Open. specifically sequenced. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. and click OK. and select Specify. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. You now have a local copy of the project. under Username. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. skip the following section. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. 11 On the File menu. User 2: Create a local file. enter User 2. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. click Save As. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. and click OK. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. In the following section of this exercise. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. click Worksets. instructions are staggered. select the central file. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 7 In the Open dialog.rvt. and click OK. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened.

and double-click Level 1. click Save to Central. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. User 1: Check out worksets. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. expand Views (all).You are now the owner of that workset. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning.” 29 Click OK. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. modify the building model. 19 On the File menu. it becomes the active workset. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. If it is not open. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. 23 Click OK. 27 On the File menu. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. 24 In the Project Browser. If you only have one workset checked out. select the lower exterior wall. 17 Click OK. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. expand Floor Plans. click Worksets. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. and double-click Level 1. open it now. and select Yes for Editable.

select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. right-click Copy of Level 1. 43 In the Project Browser.” 35 Click OK. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. you should create a furniture plan view. right-click Level 1. When you save to central. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. and click OK. The changes User 2 made are apparent. 42 Select Furniture Layout. under Views (all). However. under Floor Plans. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. 44 In the Project Browser. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. click Worksets.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. 41 On the File menu. 33 On the File menu. click Save to Central. 46 In the Project Browser. Before adding any furniture. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. under Floor Plans. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. under Floor Plans. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. click Save to Central. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Reload Latest. User 1: Reload latest worksets. select Yes for Editable. 37 On the File menu. and click OK.” 39 Click OK. 45 In the Rename View dialog. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. and click Rename. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. Click Yes.

Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. 66 On the File menu. select Project Standards.” 55 Click OK. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. click Save to Central. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. click Modify. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. such as Wall Types. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. click Edit/New. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. Therefore. rather than Families. 62 On the File menu. NOTE System families. 65 Click OK. enter Exterior Wall . select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. and click OK. the Visible by default option was not selected. click Worksets. 63 In the Worksets dialog. 49 On the Design Bar. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Reload Latest. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays.200mm. click Save to Central. and click Element Properties. 53 On the File menu. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. click Rename.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. 48 In the Type Selector. are placed under Project Standards. under Show. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. click Component. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 60 In the Rename dialog. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. choose any desk. click the Worksets tab. and click OK. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. click Visibility/Graphics. 61 Click OK 2 times. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . and click inside any room. 50 On the View menu.

NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. click Training Files. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. Each user checked out worksets. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. you save the training file as a central file. At the appropriate point in this exercise. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . click Save As. click Options. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. and save 69 On the File menu. There are specific instructions for each user. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. In the final exercise of this tutorial. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. and click OK. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. you need to set up your central and local files. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. modified the building model. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. select Save to Central.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. and these problems are rectified. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. and published their changes back to the central file. This exercise requires two users and. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. select Reload Latest. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. throughout this training. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. 70 On the File menu. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. 71 In the Save to Central dialog.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Save As dialog. As each of you work. Checking out worksets. select the following. leave this file open in its current state. finished the previous workset exercises. User 1: Reload latest. and still have your local files open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Each user must have network access to the central file. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. leave this file open in its current state. In subsequent steps. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2).

click Options. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. click Options. and click OK. In addition. Set the Username to User 2. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. This is the local file for User 1. click Options.4 In the File Save Options dialog. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. Next. 5 Click Save. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and click Save. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. and click OK. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. You have created a local file which is for your use only. click Open. select Make this a Central File after save. 17 On the File menu. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 15 Click Open. select the central file. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. return to the Settings dialog. 13 In the Open dialog. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. and click OK. and select Specify. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 6 On the File menu. 18 In the Save As dialog. click Save As. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. click Save As. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 12 On the File menu. 8 In the Save As dialog. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. This is a system setting. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and click Save. and click OK. The central file should still be open. On the Settings menu. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model.

A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. if any User-Created worksets are not open. and select Yes for Editable. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. click Worksets. select Exterior Shell. Afterwards. and then click OK. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. click the File menu. select them. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 24 Under Active Workset. and click Editing Requests. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. 29 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Worksets dialog. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. select Interior Layout. 26 In the Worksets dialog. under Floor Plans. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. click Worksets. You are now the owner of that workset. and click Open. and select Yes for Editable. You are now the owner of that workset.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. double-click Level 1. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. At this point. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. After you submit the request. select the second window from the top. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. and then click OK. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. verify that Editable Only is cleared. 30 On the left exterior wall. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 27 Under Active Workset. select the Interior Layout workset.

In this multi-user exercise. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. 38 Click OK. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. 35 Click Grant. you requested permission to edit the element. and the other user granted it. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. and close 39 On the File menu. 36 Click Close. select the following. select the request submitted by User 2. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. and click OK. click Close. to Local. A message informs you that your request has been granted. select Save to Central.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. and notice the window is in the new location. In this case. click Check Now.

738 .

it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. and each option set can have multiple schemes. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. In this tutorial. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. 739 . Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. In this particular case. you can have multiple sets of design options. For example. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. After you and the client agree on the final design. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. The client has asked you to create various options. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. Using design options. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). At any time in the design process. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. In addition.

you can edit it. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. you design each of the structural options. under Option Set. In the final exercise of this lesson. 2 In the Design Options dialog. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. and click Close. make your final design decision. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. With the second option. TIP In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.In the first exercise in this lesson. you set up multiple design option sets. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). and delete the unwanted options from the project. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. After you create a design option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Training Files. click Edit Selected. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . the roof and structure systems must work together. the only available command is to create a new option set. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. each is constructed for interchangeability. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. click New. each with multiple design options. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. therefore. In the second exercise.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to manage and organize the design options.

either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. expand Floor Plans. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. and the third column centered between the two. TIP To center the middle column. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). expand Views (all). 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. 5 On the View menu. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. click Modify. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. click Column. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. By selecting Multiple. click 12 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Edit toolbar. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. add three columns. 7 In the Type Selector. In the following illustration. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region.4 In the Project Browser. or add a dimension string between the columns. 9 On the Design Bar. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. select: ■ ■ ■ . and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. In this case.

15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. When you are finished. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 18 On the View toolbar. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . they are difficult to see in this view. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. click . Because of the size of the columns. 17 Zoom out and. A copy of the three selected columns is added. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. using the same technique. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction.

19 In the Project Browser.Notice the 12 columns that you added. double-click TOP OF CORE. 23 On the Design Bar. Adding a beam is a two-click process. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. click Beam. and click at its center to set the beam start point. Next. The second click specifies the end of the beam. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. under Floor Plans. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. select Round Bar : 50mm. 21 In the Type Selector. click Modify. In it. Use the following illustration as a guide. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. The first click specifies the beam start point. Zoom in on the upper right column. you add the beams that span the columns. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 .

and click the center point. click 26 On the Options Bar. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. zoom into the left column. click . 28 Zoom out. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies.25 On the Edit toolbar. select: ■ ■ ■ . 30 On the View toolbar. move down to the next set of columns. 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. and select the center of the column to add a copy.

Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. click Rename. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 45 Under Roofing. click Rename. and click OK. 32 In the Design Options dialog. under Option. 46 Under Option. under Option Set. 41 Under Option Set. enter Beam for New. 40 In the Rename dialog. There should now be two roofing design options. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. click Rename. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. under Option. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . and click OK. enter Brackets for New. click New. name the option Louvers. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. and click OK.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. and click OK. click New. under Option. 37 Select Option 2 and. enter Roofing for New. 43 In the Rename dialog. click Rename. 34 In the Design Options dialog. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). enter Structure for New. click New. and click OK. not a new option set. under Option. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. select Option 1 (primary). click Rename. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. 38 In the Rename dialog. 33 Click Finish Editing. 36 In the Rename dialog. under Option Set. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and.

select Edit Selected. 51 Under Edit. click Rename. 50 In the Design Options dialog. name the option Sunscreen. and click OK. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. select Beam. 53 In the Project Browser. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise.47 Under Roofing. under Structure. When finished. under Floor Plans. 52 Click Close. double-click ROOF TERRACE. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. This allows you to more easily manage the project. select Option 2. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . it will resemble the following illustration. you create the second design option. Under Now Editing. 48 Under Option.

click Component. 56 In the Type Selector. The second click represents the plane that is moved. select M_Roof Beam.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. click Align. 58 On the Tools menu. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. Refer to the following illustration. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 .

62 Select the beam and. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. click Modify.60 After aligning the beam. The first click sets the move start point. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. on the Edit toolbar. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. The second click represents the move end point. 61 On the Design Bar. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. Click to indicate the end point of the move.

and click Save. you need this file in its current state. m_Urban_House-in progress. which is visible by default. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. click Finish Editing. click Save As. Notice that even before you close the dialog. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. 66 On the View toolbar. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 70 On the File menu.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. That is because the brackets option is set to primary.rvt. name the file. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. 68 In the Design Options dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 69 Click Close. click . Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . 67 On the Tools menu.

In the next exercise. a Louver system. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. delete them after the rafter is in place. Sunscreen. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. The first option. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. click Component. open it now. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 4 Under Edit. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. 5 Click Close. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. do so now. you design each of the roofing options. you set up multiple design option sets. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise.In this exercise. expand Views (all). You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. 6 In the Project Browser. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. each with multiple design options to pick from. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. the other for beams. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Louvers (primary). select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. under Roofing. expand Floor Plans. 8 In the Type Selector. With the second option. 3 In the Design Options dialog. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. If you need to add dimensions. 2 On the Tools menu. Under Now Editing. and double-click TOP OF CORE.rvt. 10 Referring to the following illustration. click Edit Selected. The second roofing system.

11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. click Array. Enter 5 for Number. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Select 2nd for Move To. 13 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 15 On the Edit menu. 16 On the Options Bar. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. Select Constrain. under Other. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. click . enter 11750 mm for Length.

752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. enter 990. when the listening dimension displays. and press ENTER. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created.

click Component. under Other. 27 For the array starting point. Select Constrain. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . enter 5475 mm for Length. and click OK. 23 On the Options Bar. click the Edit menu. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the louver you just placed. 22 On the Design Bar. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. click Modify. 20 In the Type Selector. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. 25 With the louver still selected. and click Array.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Enter 34 for Number. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. click . Select 2nd for Move To. 26 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate.

754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . enter 300. and. Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart. and press Enter. click . when the listening dimension displays.28 Move the cursor vertically downward. 29 On the View toolbar.

click . you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. and then click Close. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. 30 On the Tools menu. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. under Edit. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . click Lines. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. select Sunscreen. Therefore. under Roofing. click Edit Selected. and click OK.The louver roof system is complete. In this case. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. Click OK. 34 In the Project Browser. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. 40 On the Options Bar. expand Elevations. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. 39 On the Design Bar. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. 31 In the Design Options dialog. and double-click West. click Finish Editing. 33 Under Editing.

then the center arc. click Properties. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. Select the right arc. the top of the next column on the right. click Finish Sketch. The first two points define the ends of the line. The arcs should connect. 46 On the Tools menu. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. then you can modify it through the dimension. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. You will fix this in a later step. click Trim/Extend. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. 48 On the Design Bar. click . 41 Select the top of the left column. 49 On the View toolbar. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. and the third point defines the arc. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. 43 On the Design Bar. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. Under Constraints. 45 Click OK.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. Under Constraints. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc.

3 In the Rename View dialog. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. a Louver system. Managing Design Options | 757 . NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. make it part of the building model. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. and click Duplicate. click Finish Editing. and then click Close. under Edit. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. 4 In the Project Browser. 51 In the Design Options dialog. and delete the discarded design options. you need this file in its current state. right-click {3D}. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. secondary. do so now. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. you select a design. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. click Save. under Views (all). you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. and last options. Sunscreen. 2 In the Project Browser. Managing Design Options In this exercise. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. The second roofing system. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. expand 3D Views. 52 On the File menu. under Views (all). and click Rename. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. tertiary.The louver roof system is complete. After exploring the combinations. The first option. enter Primary Option. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. you designed each of the roofing options. under 3D Views. 50 On the Tools menu. In this exercise. and click OK.

and click Rename. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. under 3D Views. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. click the Design Options tab. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.5 Right-click each of the copies. 7 On the View menu. double-click Primary Option. 11 On the View menu. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Secondary Option. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. under 3D Views. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Views (all). 9 Click OK. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 10 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). click the Design Options tab.

under 3D Views. 15 On the View menu. under 3D Views.14 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Last Option. under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). At this point. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. In your design options. In this case. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. click the Design Options tab. double-click Tertiary Option. and click OK. click the Design Options tab. and click OK. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. 18 In the Project Browser. 19 On the View menu. Managing Design Options | 759 . 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. click Visibility/Graphics.

under Structure. 30 Under Option Set. An alert is displayed. click Yes. 27 In the alert dialog. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. and deleted the discarded design options. but should be accepted as part of the building model. This was the client choice for structural. click Accept Primary. 26 Under Option Set. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. click Yes. select Make Primary. you selected a design. select Beam. The set is deleted. the current primaries are no longer options. 29 Select Roofing. 25 Select Structure. 31 In the alert dialog. since you no longer need them. Because the client has selected the design option. click Delete to remove the views that used options. In this exercise. 23 In the Design Options dialog. made it part of the building model. 33 In the Design Options dialog. click Delete. 35 On the File menu. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. double-click Primary Option. click Close. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model.22 On the Tools menu. the beam option becomes part of the model. After exploring the combinations. click Save. 24 Under Option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views.

You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. 761 . In the second exercise. and then add new building model elements. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. In the second exercise. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. You create new phases.Project Phasing 22 In any project. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. then add new walls and doors in a different location. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. complete with schedules. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You create new phases. demolish existing construction. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. This changes room definition and total building model area. In the lesson and exercises that follow. For the client. demolish existing walls and doors.

click Project Units. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Phasing. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. 7 Click Cancel. under Phasing. and double-click Level 1. click (Element Properties). you work in a simple model that requires renovation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. When you create a new project. expand Floor Plans. click Modify. click Training Files. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. and None is selected for Phase Demolished.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. During the demolition and renovation process. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. 6 On the Options Bar.rvt. If you wish to do so. under Phasing. This means that all building model elements. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. go to the Settings menu. As you add new elements to the building model. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. In the Element Properties dialog. define the units. are visible in this view. expand Views (all). regardless of phase. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. you do not need to change the project units to metric. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. and click OK. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. 4 Click Cancel.

you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. right-click Copy of Level 1 . under Floor Plans. and click OK. TIP If this were a multi-story building. enter Level 1 . right-click Level 1 . 16 In the Rename dialog. 10 On the Options Bar. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. click . all of the building model elements. under Floor Plans.Demo. click (Filter Selection). Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. After you release the mouse button. Because this is a renovation project. under Floor Plans. and click OK. clear Door Tags. Because this is a phase-specific view.Existing. for Phase Created. and click OK. click Modify.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. 12 On the Options Bar. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. 17 Click No.Existing. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. Phasing Your Model | 763 . 18 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Design Bar. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. under Phasing. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. are highlighted in red. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. including the door tags. and click Rename. and click Rename. right-click Level 1. 20 In the Rename dialog. enter Level 1 . draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it.Existing. select Existing. After you create the views. 11 In the Filter dialog. 19 In the Project Browser. and click OK.

click the Phase Filters tab. 28 Under Filter Name. select Existing. 24 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Project Browser. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. and Temporary. There are five default phase filters. you modify these settings. Existing. however. double-click Level 1 . enter Composite Plan. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. Demolished. 26 In the Phasing dialog. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. to which all the building model elements belong. for Phase. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing .You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. On a logical time line.Existing. Next. 29 For Composite Plan. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. Later in this exercise. You may need to zoom in to see this. Because of this time relationship. Phase status is time-dependent. and click OK. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction.Demo. under Floor Plans. select Overridden. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. under New. double-click Level 1 . 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. In this case. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. under Phasing. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 27 Click New. new construction occurs after existing construction.

Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. There are two ways to demolish an element. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. under Cut ➤ Lines. you demolish all elements hosted by it. As you click each wall. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. its display changes to a red dashed line. 32 In the Demolished row. 42 In the Project Browser. or you can use the demolish tool. 34 In the Color dialog. 36 Using the same method. Phasing Your Model | 765 . Notice that the demolished walls continue to display.Existing. you begin demolition. select the line style. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. double-click Level 1 . select red. click OK. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. 39 In the Phasing dialog. select the interior walls one at a time. Next. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. select a lighter blue. under Floor Plans. click the value for Color. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements.31 Under Phase Status. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. under Floor Plans. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. When you demolish the host.Demo. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. click (Demolish). select Demolished. double-click Level 1 . 35 Click OK twice.

46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. The demolished walls no longer display. under Phasing. 49 On the Design Bar. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . for Phase Filter. 50 In the Type Selector. for Phase Filter. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". and click OK.Existing. click Door. 52 Open Level 1 . 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 51 Add a door leading into each room. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. 53 Open Level 1 .Demo. and click OK. 47 In the Type Selector. select Show Previous + New. under Phasing. click Wall.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). 45 In the Element Properties dialog. select Basic Wall: Interior . and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. add a long horizontal wall.

61 On the View Control Bar.New. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. right-click Level 1 . regardless of phase. because the phase filter is set to Show All. and existing shows as half-tone. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. click (Default 3D View). new is shown in blue. All elements are displayed in this view.Demo.New. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . which are displayed as red. 62 If necessary. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 57 In the Project Browser. 59 Open Level 1 . Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. 60 On the View toolbar. Phasing Your Model | 767 . You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. The renovated building model plan is displayed.

the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. the rooms change in both definition and size.rvt. All room boundaries are phase-specific. you can see the new walls added to the building model. In this exercise. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all).Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. In this view. In this view. you do not need to change the project units to metric. 63 Close the file. If you wish to save this file. click Project Units.Existing. define the units. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. 2 Open Level 1 . Notice that this view is the original building model. You can also see that the room quantities. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . As the renovation process continues. and new construction. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can do so at this time. click Training Files. therefore. go to the Settings menu. If you wish to do so.New. and click OK. and double-click Level 1 . demolition. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. In the next exercise. 3 Open Level 1 . Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. sizes. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation.Demo.

New. yet they have different room numbers. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. 9 On the Design Bar. and maximize the view. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click OK.Demo.Existing. click Modify. 11 On the Design Bar. 6 Open Level 1 . click in each room as you move to the right. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 10 Open Level 1 . 13 Open Level 1 . Use the following illustration as a guide. click Room. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. In the Phasing dialog. click Room Tag. click Room. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . click in each room to create a room and place a room tag.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction.

View phase-specific room schedules. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. 17 On the Window menu. In addition. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. In this case.New Construction. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases.Existing. 20 Close the file. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. 18 Open Room Schedule . 19 On the Window menu. In this exercise. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. expand Schedules/Quantities. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. The two schedule views tile. click Close Hidden Windows. 16 In the Project Browser. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. click Tile. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. and double-click Room Schedule .

and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. In these situations. 771 . or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. In the final lesson. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. performance. In this tutorial. and manage the links throughout the project. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. modify their visibility.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. You position the building models on the site plan. This maximizes efficiency. Comparison of alternatives on a site.

Automatic placement options: ■ Auto .Linking Building Models In this lesson. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. You link two building models to the project. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. and the other is a townhouse. One building model is a condominium. You position the building models on the site. modify their visibility.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project.

Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. click Training Files. RELATED See the lesson. this system is not exposed to the user. in the Model Linking folder that you created. and click Properties. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. and click OK. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. click Open.rvt. 5 On the File menu. 8 Clear Read-only. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. 2 On the File menu. this option will place the link at a predefined location. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. This option is grayed out. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . c_Condo_Complex. and save the file there. however. Select c_Site. with write permission. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. click Save As. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. and open Common\c_Site.■ Auto . 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. you can do so. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. click Open. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . select the three files. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. Manual . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. ■ ■ Manual . NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. click Close. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. All three files now reside.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. Click Open. 4 On the File menu. right-click. Otherwise. c_Townhouse. Auto .Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location.

11 On the File menu. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. select Auto . Notice the blue detail lines. If you wish to do so. and make your changes. and double-click Level 1.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. expand Floor Plans. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units. expand Views (all). click Project Units. 10 In the Project Browser. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. you can go to the Settings menu. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 13 Click Open.Origin to Origin. you do not need to change the project units to metric. For Positioning. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites.

click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. 16 For the move start point. 15 On the Edit toolbar. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. The Move command requires two clicks. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. click (Move). After you select it.rvt displays in the Type Selector.The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. The linked model moves as one object. 17 For the move endpoint. Standard move commands work with linked building models. The first click specifies the move start point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . The second click specifies the move endpoint. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects.

Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. and select c_Townhouse. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.Origin to Origin. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . select Auto . 18 On the View menu. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. For Positioning.After you specify the location to move to. 21 Click Open.

and then click to specify the end of the rotation. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. To rotate an object. 23 On the Edit toolbar. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. In this case. and click to specify the end of the rotation. click (Rotate). you first specify the rotation start point.The townhouse building model displays above the site model. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. click to specify the rotation start point. when the vertical line displays.

This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. click (Move). 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar.

and the second click specifies the copy-to point. The Copy command works much like the Move command.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. click (Copy). select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. The first click specifies the start point. 30 For the starting point.

33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. click . and click OK. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 37 On the View toolbar. use the Move command to make any adjustments. 32 On the Edit menu. 34 On the Options Bar. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. under Identity data. for Name.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. click (Default 3D View). if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. enter Townhouse A. click Rotate.

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. click (SteeringWheels). and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration.38 On the File menu. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. do so before continuing. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . In the next exercise. click and hold Orbit. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. you need this project file open and in this view. After linking the files. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. In this exercise. When you originally linked the files. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. they were placed too low within the site topography. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. click Save. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. In this exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 2 On the SteeringWheels. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels.

In the steps that follow. 7 On the Tools toolbar. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. To do this. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. and click to select the line. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .rvt. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. expand Elevations.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. In this case. when it highlights. you first select the plane you want to align to. When using the Align command. 3 In the Project Browser. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. and click OK. and double-click South. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. and click to select it. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. and then select the plane that you want to align. click (Align). Click the Revit Links tab. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. under Views (all). clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex.

click Save. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. 12 On the View toolbar. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. 15 On the File menu. 14 On the SteeringWheels. click 13 On the View toolbar. 9 In the Project Browser. click and hold Orbit. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. 11 Return to the South elevation view. (SteeringWheels). Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. double-click North. under Elevations. click (Default 3D View). align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. This would over-constrain the model.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project.

then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. click Visibility/Graphics. In the next exercise. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. or Custom.rvt. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. double-click South. display settings. detail level. do so before continuing. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. you need this project file open and in this view. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. 4 Under Visibility. click By Host View. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. click Custom.rvt. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. By linked view. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. scroll down and clear Levels.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. 2 On the View menu. If you have not completed the previous exercise. expand c_Townhouse. 9 Under Visibility. As you can see. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click the Revit Links tab. and the halftone settings for each linked project. 8 For Annotation Categories. In this exercise. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. you can independently control the visibility settings. If the Basics page is set to Custom. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. 10 Click OK. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. click OK. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. under Elevations. select <Custom>. When you link a file. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

rvt. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. 24 Click OK. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. By default. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. 16 Under Visibility. With linked files. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. under Display Settings. Using the Custom option. In this case.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. or fine. click the Revit Links tab.rvt. 20 For c_Townhouse. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. on the Basics tab. click By Host View.rvt. 23 In the Model categories list. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. and click OK. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. select <Custom>. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. double-click Level 1. 14 On the View menu. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . select Custom. medium. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. By selecting custom under Model Categories. You can click the value for Detail Level. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. no detail level changes are required. click the Revit Links tab. click Visibility/Graphics. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. click Visibility/Graphics. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and then set the detail level to coarse. expand c_Townhouse. under Floor Plans.

all new. In the next exercise. All other components are grayed out. demolished. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. By default. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. click OK. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. you manage the linked files. 26 Under Display Settings. 31 On the File menu. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. on a sloped site for instance. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. 25 On the Revit Links tab. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed.rvt. However. select c_Townhouse. and phase filter of a specific link. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. 28 Select By linked view for View range. click Custom for the Townhouse link. you need this project file open and in this view. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. In most cases. under Visibility. there are situations. With the Show All filter applied.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. 29 Click OK. click Save. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. In this case. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. existing. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. phase. In this exercise. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. this is preferable. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. In this case.

NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. Notice the Loaded. click the Revit tab. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. select c_Condo_Complex. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. do so before continuing. In a shared coordinate environment.rvt. and Saved Path fields are read only. 7 Click OK. 4 Under Linked File. click Yes. 5 Click Unload.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. click Manage Links. 6 At the confirmation prompt. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. the link is maintained. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. If you have not completed the previous exercise. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. In general. Locations Not Saved. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. They supply information regarding the links. 3 Under Path Type. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. You learn more about this in the next lesson. The default path type is Relative. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute.

In these cases. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. expand Revit Links. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. In general. and click Reload. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. 9 On the File menu. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. and select Specify. 8 In the Project Browser. click Save As. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. To do this. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. the link is not loaded. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. right-click c_Condo_Complex.rvt. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. If you choose not to open that workset. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. However. click the arrow next to the Open button. When you initially place the link. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens.

project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. In the next lesson. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. When you share coordinates between projects. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. When used in conjunction with model linking. you are establishing a shared origin point. If you have not completed the previous lesson. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. In essence. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. do so before continuing. The host file consists primarily of site components. In this exercise. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files.10 In the Save As dialog. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. leave the project file open in its current view. name the file Site_Project. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. and the resulting project files. and save it as an RVT file. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772.

Linking Building Models on page 772. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. When you are working in the host project. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. As indicated in the Status Bar. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. Select Site_Project. 2 On the Tools menu. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. click Open. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. open it before continuing. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt and click Open. 3 In the drawing area. and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the lesson. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. do so before continuing.coordinates are used. click the Condo Complex. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. If you have closed the project. In this case. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you can publish the coordinates of the linked files.

Lot B. 5 On the Design Bar. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. when the edges highlight. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. even though both models originate from one linked file. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. If you have not completed the exercise. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. click to select it. These three locations can be named Lot A. and Lot C. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. but can have multiple additional locations. On the Status Bar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. it is placed at a specific location. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 .4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. and click OK. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. this location is not saved outside of the host project. In this exercise. select Location 1. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. However. you need this project file open and in this view. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. do so before continuing. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host.

notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. under Instance Parameters. and click OK. click Not Shared for Shared Location. and click OK. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Rename. 4 Under Value. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. click . 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. select Move instance to. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. enter Lot A for New. 12 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Select Location dialog. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. 7 In the Rename dialog. When constraining a link to a location. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use.2 On the Options Bar. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. click Not Shared for Shared Location. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. . After a link instance is assigned a shared location. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. click Reconcile. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. In the Choose Location dialog. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. This is a one-time operation. under Instance Parameters. Record the current position as a location. click Change. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location.

Because Lot A is currently in use. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. and click OK. When you create a location. 30 On the Tools menu. and the left townhouse resides at that location. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists.Notice the OK button is not active. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. select the second option. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Record current position as. click OK. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. select Save. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. click Manage Links. and click OK. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. Notice the OK button is still not active. To explicitly save a location. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. The first click specifies the move start point. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . a warning displays. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. 26 Click OK. or cancel the action. Save locations 21 On the File menu. click Duplicate. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click the Revit tab. By relocating a project. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. When you release the mouse button. The second click specifies the move endpoint. This is a two-click process. make sure Lot B is selected. and then select the townhouse project. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. 23 Click Save Locations. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. click OK. the active location position is moved. 19 In the Select Location dialog. 16 Click Change. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. enter Lot B for Name. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. you cannot redefine its location. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. When you relocate a project. ignore the warning. and click OK. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog.

and click OK. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. NOTE In the following exercise. click Close. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you work in one of the linked projects. 34 On the File menu. select Save. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. In this exercise. click Save. 36 On the File menu. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. 33 On the Edit menu.

3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. if other models were linked into the same host. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. Select c_Condo_Complex. click Open. For Positioning. 2 On the File menu. The current active location is Lot A.By Shared Coordinates. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. Click Open. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project.rvt file. Also. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. In this exercise. When opening the linked file. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. do so before continuing. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. under Floor Plans. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. double-click 1st Floor. it is placed automatically within the host project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Because this building model only has one named location. select Auto . In addition. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 .rvt file. If you have not completed the exercises. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.

enter Lot C. you create a new location. you can select Lot C if necessary. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. click View Properties. select True North for Orientation. In the host file. and click OK. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. 6 Select Lot B. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. click OK. do so before continuing. under Graphics. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click Duplicate. click Manage Place and Locations. you need this project file open and in this view. you manage the shared locations. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. and click Make Current. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. If you have not completed the exercises. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. In the next exercise. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Click OK.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. 3 In the Name dialog. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. In this exercise. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. and click OK. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Manage Place and Locations. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. orient a view to true north.

you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. If you have not completed the exercise. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Select Site_Project. click Close. On the Options Bar. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. do so before continuing. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. In this exercise. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . 10 On the File menu.rvt and click Open. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Open. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. You can save the file if you wish. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool.

select Doors. and click OK. select Count. click the Fields tab. and click Add. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. under Category. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 5 Under Available fields.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. select Family and Type for Sort by. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. expand Schedules/Quantities. You have completed this tutorial. click Close. and then click OK twice. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the File menu. under Other. 14 On the File menu. and click Properties. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . 12 Select Grand totals. In this exercise. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. clear Itemize every instance. click Save.8 Click OK. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. right-click Door Schedule.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

rte. In the second lesson. select Invert background color. you modify the system environment. notification preferences.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. click the Graphics tab. click OK. Finally. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you create an office template. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. These settings control the graphics. and your username when using worksets. click Training Files. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. Notice that the drawing area is black. In the first lesson. click Browse. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. journal cleanup options. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. they are not saved to project files or template files. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. 4 Under Colors. and set it as your default template. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. under Template file. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. 3 In the Options dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click the value for Selection color. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. 11 Under Colors. 803 . which is independent of the project settings. 10 In the Options dialog. 6 In the New Project dialog. and click OK. click the Graphics tab. 8 In the New Project dialog. selection default options.

18 On the Design Bar. click the Graphics tab. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 On the Design Bar. However. select red. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. click Modify. 15 Click OK. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. click No. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. select None. select yellow. the elements causing the error display using this color. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 22 When prompted to save changes. click Modify. For Tooltip assistance. select One hour. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 13 Click the General tab. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . When an error occurs. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that the system settings apply to this project.12 In the Color dialog. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. and select the wall. 26 In the Options dialog. and click OK. clear Invert background color.rvt. 14 Under Notifications. click Wall. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. For Selection color. and open Metric\m_Settings.

Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. you can start a new project with that template. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). 30 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 In the Places dialog. and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and click Open. However. click Places. click Browse. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog.27 Click the General tab. 3 Under Default template file. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. under Default path for family template files. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. including your default project template. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. centralized. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. notice the list of library names. select Normal. such as in a large. For Tooltip assistance. TIP To view a template. and click Browse to select a template. select the folder to save your files to by default. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. Your login name displays by default. 2 In the Options dialog. family template files. 8 Click Cancel. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. do not save the changes. This path is set automatically during the installation process. Specifying File Locations on page 805. If prompted. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. click the File Locations tab. Under Journal File Cleanup. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files. Under Username. you specify default file locations. 7 In the Options dialog. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. These files are used in the software support process. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. click Browse. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. click Browse. select your preferred Save reminder interval. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. Specifying File Locations In this exercise.

or loading a Revit Architecture file. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 11 In the Places dialog. or families. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. saving. under Libraries. and you can create new libraries. and change the name to My Library. Load. Save. click (Add Value). and select it as the library path. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. templates. When you are opening. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. In the following illustration. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. and click the icon side of the field. and click Open.library names and path. and Import dialogs.

click Edit. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. 28 Click OK. such as bump maps. 22 Click Places. and Import dialogs. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Load. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. click Edit. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click the Spelling tab. 9 In the text editor. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter sheetmtl-Cu. and decal image files. 15 Under Library Name. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 5 In the text editor. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. and click OK twice. 3 Under Settings. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. (Remove Value) to delete the library. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . specify the new location here. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 24 Click 25 Click OK. click the My Library icon. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. custom color files. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 23 Select My Library. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 21 Click the File Locations tab. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 2 In the Options dialog. If you work in a large office. If you want to relocate this path. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 19 Click Cancel. view the current path.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. scroll down the list of building industry terms. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. This path is determined during installation. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. Save. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. click My Library.

Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. you modify snap settings. 12 On the Standard toolbar. click Text. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 19 Under Settings. work with snapping turned off. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 22 In the text editor. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 23 In the Options dialog. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click Restore Defaults. As you zoom in and out within a view. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click default template. click File menu ➤ Save.rte. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you modify snap increments. In this exercise. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 18 In the Options dialog. You can turn snap settings on and off. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Browse. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. click Training Files. click OK. 20 Under Personal dictionary. 2 In the New Project dialog. click the Spelling tab. 14 Click in the drawing area. click Modify. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. do not save the changes. delete sheetmtl-CU. click OK. 21 In the text editor. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. under Template file. If prompted. click OK. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. 4 In the New Project dialog. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click Edit.11 In the Options dialog.

and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. 10 On the Options Bar. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. snapping reverts to the system default settings.6 Under Dimension Snaps. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. 8 In the Snaps dialog. enter SM. and enter 500 . click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . zoom out until it does so. If it does not. 7 Under Object Snaps. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. click OK. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. clear Chain. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. and move the cursor to the right. TIP To zoom while sketching.. such as ZO to zoom out. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. click Wall. For example. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. If you do not have a wheel button. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. While sketching. use the wheel button on your mouse.

If you move the cursor along the wall. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. 21 Move the cursor downward. Notice that snapping is once again active. and specify the wall endpoint. Do not set the wall end point. and move the cursor to the right. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. and click Wall. the midpoint. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 18 Enter SM. click Modify. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 24 Click OK. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Make sure you also delete the semicolon. and the wall edges. and delete the value 500 . This is the increment that you added previously. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and do not save the file. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. it will snap to the endpoints.. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. Modifying Project Settings on page 811.

you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. you render a region to observe the changes. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views.rvt. Using these options. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. lines. click Training Files. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. fill patterns. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Settings. and object styles. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. Finally. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. In the steps that follow. When you apply a material to an element. You create and modify materials. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. annotations. save the project file with a unique name. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

this material provides a starting point for the new material. and double-click 02 Entry Level. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. 3 Click (Duplicate). 10 Click the Graphics tab. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. In the Materials dialog. When you change properties of a render appearance. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. 2 Scroll down the materials list. select Stone. In the steps that follow. However. read-only library for render appearances. The properties describe the color. and texture of the material. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. Masonry . 13 Select the lower exterior wall. and click OK. and click (Element Properties). This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. When a model element is loaded into a project. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. The Render Appearance Library is a local. for Class. In the next exercise. 6 Click Replace. and select Masonry . Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. enter Masonry . These details will display in rendered images. and click OK. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. 9 Click Apply.Fieldstone material. 11 Click OK.Stone.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project.Fieldstone.Fieldstone. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. scale.

20 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. Fieldstone on CMU. click Model Graphics Style. . click Edit. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. select Masonry .Fieldstone. click This is the material that you created. 19 On the right side of the Material field. It is currently assigned the material Masonry .Brick. 21 Click OK three times. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. click in the Material field. 25 On the View toolbar. 23 While pressing CTRL. 15 Click Duplicate. Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . click Edit/New. click (Default 3D View). 17 For Structure. 26 On the View Control Bar. 22 Select the left exterior wall. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU.Fieldstone. and click OK. select the rear exterior wall. 24 In the Type Selector.14 In the Element Properties dialog. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. 18 For Finish 1. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . 16 Enter the new wall name.

you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. When finished. under Quality. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. right-click the Design Bar. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. 28 In the Rendering dialog. for Setting. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. 29 In the 3D view. select Low or Medium. In the following exercise. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select the render region (a red rectangle). click Rendering Dialog. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. and click Rendering. 31 In the Rendering dialog. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. select Region. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. 32 In the Rendering dialog. The rendering process begins. click Render.

Then click Render again. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 3 Under Pattern Type. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. click Show the model.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. such as steel. click Show the model. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. click Import. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. choose Model. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. and double-click West. 33 In the Rendering dialog. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. Drafting pattern density is fixed. Zoom into the model.rvt. 5 Click New. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. select Custom. and clear Region. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. expand Elevations. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. in the Rendering dialog. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. 7 Under Custom. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. m_Settings-in progress.

In the Materials dialog. 23 On the Design Bar. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. 18 Under Surface Pattern. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. select fldstn. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. and click OK. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. click Training Files. for Finish 1. click in the Material field.pat. click to select a fill pattern. click 15 For Structure.56. 21 In the Materials dialog. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. enter . 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.Fieldstone material. 10 For Name. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . click OK. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . 22 Click OK three times. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Modify. 9 Under Custom.Fieldstone. select Model. and for Import scale. 11 Click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click . enter Fieldstone. (Element Properties). click Edit/New. under Pattern Type. click Edit.

You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . For example. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. click (Default 3D View). and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. and double-click 3 Windows. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. you can set the window frame material to By Category. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 2 On the keyboard. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents.25 On the View toolbar. adjust your zoom settings as needed. expand 3D Views. m_Settings-in progress. TIP If the pattern does not display. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. there are often multiple window types within a project.rvt.

6 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. for Trim Exterior Material. and click 15 Click OK twice. 10 Select the arched window. for Trim Exterior Material. . Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. click (Element Properties). under Materials and Finishes. click in the Value column. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 14 In the Materials dialog. click By Category (located under the materials list). click By Category. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. and click . click in the Value column. click Edit/New. click (Element Properties). click Modify. 5 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. 12 In the Element Properties dialog.3 On the View Control Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. 9 Click OK twice. 13 In the Type Properties dialog.

click in the Material column. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. and select Trim.red paint. (Duplicate). The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. 29 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. click OK. When you render a 3D view. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. type red. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. 28 Under Shading. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. 19 For Trim. for Name.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. descriptions. and click OK. 23 Click Replace. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. enter Trim . 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. click OK. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . select Trim. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. . for Class. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. 25 In the search field. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. select Paint. 18 On the Model Objects tab. or keywords include the word red. expand Windows.

31 On the View toolbar. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . under Category. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise.rvt. m_Settings-in progress. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. m_Settings-in progress. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click New. 11 For Line Pattern. for Name. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 10 For Line Color. (Default 3D view).rvt. Now that you have created a line pattern. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. 7 On the View Control Bar. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. enter Roof Line. select Roofs. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. select Roof Line. is open with the 3D view active. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. select Red.

but not the line pattern. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. click Model Graphics Style. double-click to Building. 13 In the Project Browser.12 Click OK. under 3D Views. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . Notice that the line color displays in this view. 14 On the View Control Bar.

The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. double-click 03 Roof. select Roofs. 22 On the Model Categories tab. for Visibility. 20 Click OK. click Override. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select Black. sections. 19 For Line Pattern. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Plans. select 5. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. 15 In the Project Browser. For Pattern. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Category. 18 For Line Color. For Color. select Roofs. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. elevations. select Blue. select Solid. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. under Floor Plans. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. select Roof Line.

30 For the Zoning Setback category. under Modify Subcategories. For Line Pattern. For Line Color. select 2. (Line). enter Zoning Setback. Notice the site topography and the property lines. click Lines. Click Click (Draw). specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. and click OK. click New. double-click Site.25 Click OK twice. 29 For Name. This places the line above the topography. 34 On the Options Bar. 33 In the Type Selector. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . select Double dash. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. select Zoning Setback. specify the following: ■ For Plane. select Red. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. under Floor Plans. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 31 Click OK. select Level: 02 Entry Level. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser.

under Floor Plans. Expand Site.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. NOTE If Site is not selected. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click 02 Entry Level. and clear Zoning Setback. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select it. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. and then clear Property Lines. 38 On the Model Categories tab. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. expand Lines. Modifying Annotations on page 825. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. (Default 3D View). as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 43 Click OK. 39 Click OK. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. and clear Property Lines. click (Default 3D View). 44 On the View toolbar. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. 40 In the Project Browser. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 36 On the View toolbar. and clear Zoning Setback. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines.

(Undo). for Units Format. 10 On the Standard toolbar. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 Under Text. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. click one wall. Modifying Annotations | 825 . and place a dimension on the floor plan. click Modify. click another wall. 9 In the Type Selector. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. m_Settings-in progress. 7 Click OK twice. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt. 4 Enter the name Linear .Imperial. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. You have created a new dimension style. double-click 02 Entry Level. click the default value. select Linear . click Duplicate. select Feet and fractional inches. m_Settings-in progress.Imperial and click OK. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. and then click outside the second wall. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. click Dimension. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. For Units. To place a dimension. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. under Floor Plans.

Leave M_Window Tag .Number as the assigned tag. click Training Files. 28 On the Design Bar. under Category. click M_Window Tag .Number is now the assigned tag. click (Element Properties). click the bottom window. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Leader. 26 On the Options Bar. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. In the steps that follow. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. 21 In the Tags dialog. scroll down to Windows.14 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the preview image. click Tag All Not Tagged. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . 16 Click Cancel. 24 While pressing CTRL. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. 19 Click Load. select the 3 window tags. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. notice that the label displays 1i. 18 In the Tags dialog.Number. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. 23 Click OK. 27 On the west wall. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value.Number. click Tag ➤ By Category. Then press Delete. 22 Under Loaded Tags. and select the drop-down arrow that displays.rfa.

Specifying Units of Measurement. select 0 decimal places.Number. Specifying Units of Measurement. click the default value.Under Category. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. you modify the detail level assignments. and click OK. Unless overridden. M_Window Tag . 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. dimensions use these project settings. and click OK. 3 In the Format dialog. verify that Create is clear. 31 On the Design Bar. (Default 3D View). In the first section. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. click Modify. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. m_Settings-in progress. for Length. and click OK. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. In the final section. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. 6 Click OK. 4 In the Project Units dialog.rvt.Temporary Dimensions. select Faces. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. you modify the temporary dimension settings. 8 Under Walls. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. notice Window Tags appears twice. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. Specifying Units of Measurement. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. 32 On the View toolbar. Click OK. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. click the default value. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. dimension values display using this setting. 9 Under Doors and Windows.Temporary Dimensions. for Area. and Detail Level Options on page 827. and Detail Level Options | 827 . the other displays the instance value. you specify the project units of measurements. In the second section. 30 Under Leader. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. Unless overridden. select meters squared. select To the nearest 100. 2 In the Project Units dialog. select Openings. For Unit symbol. for Rounding. Temporary Dimensions.

Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. and expand 3D Views. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. expand Floor Plans. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. click . You do not select a view scale to move it.rvt. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. When you create a new view and specify its view scale.In this project. In this table. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. expand Views (all). 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and open Common\c_Project_Browser. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 12 Click OK. In this exercise. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828.

4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. 6 In the Project Browser. expand each view type. and click Apply. and click OK. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. 8 Select Phase.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . expand both the Architectural and Structural views. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. 10 In the Project Browser. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . and click OK. select Type/Discipline. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. select Discipline. In the Project Browser. 5 On the Views tab. expand Sheets (all). and notice that each is grouped by discipline. notice that views are grouped by phase. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser.

18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. under Sheets. and click OK. 16 Click the Views tab. 14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 12 Click the Sheets tab.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. expand each sheet set. and click New. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. click the Folders tab.

Creating an Office Template on page 831. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. and click OK. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. enter a unique file name. In that case. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. expand Complete. 21 In the Project Browser. View Type (Family and Type). 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. click Browse. In this lesson. When you create a new template based on an existing template. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. under Views. Proceed to the next lesson. and Discipline. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. levels. In the lesson that follows. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. and view names. you select the starting point for your office template. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. and expand both Architectural and Structural. You can also save these settings in a template file. the same rules apply. You can choose from several templates. navigate to your preferred directory. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. When you create new projects. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. If you want to save this file. For example. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. and open Metric\Templates. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. 2 Under Template file. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. Creating an Office Template | 831 . you create an office template.rte template. dimensions styles. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. Whenever you create a new project or template. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. expand 3D Views. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and click Open. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. click Training Files. when you create a new project. and click OK. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office.

9 In the Project Browser. select Project template. 13 Select the default template. close them. in the drawing area. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. In this exercise. weights. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 6 Click OK. and double-click North. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. select Project. If you have additional projects open. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. you can select it now. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. you modify the project settings for your new template. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. for Create new. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. For example. click Browse. If you want to use a template other than the default. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. 12 Under Template File. When you create the material. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template.5 In the New Project dialog. 15 Under Create new. 14 Click Open. drag a zoom region around the level heads.

You do this by defining the render appearance. If you change render appearance properties. see a preview of the rendered material. create and modify them as needed. line patterns. and materials for model objects. For more details on modifying these settings. When you create or modify a material. 13 If necessary. 9 Click OK when finished. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. 4 Click Replace. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. the changes are saved as part of the project template. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. line colors. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. see the previous lesson. or refer to the online help. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. see Specifying File Locations on page 805.During this exercise. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . 11 Click the Model Objects tab. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. you can set line weights. In the Object Styles dialog. and similar attributes. rotate. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. create new subcategories. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. and change render appearance properties. or modify existing patterns. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. specific modifications are not dictated. You can align. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. and imported objects. Observe the materials that are already defined. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. or refer to the online help. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. and scroll through the list of categories. TIP For more information about creating new materials. texture. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. including color. 2 Scroll down the materials list. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. annotation objects. Modifying System Settings on page 803. transparency. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. For more information. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. and move model patterns.

line color. create new line subcategories. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. tags. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. or line pattern as needed. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. click Duplicate. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. 19 If necessary. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. such as section lines and dimension lines. 34 Click OK. select it from this list. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. 29 Click OK. select it. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. To see the details of a particular style.15 Modify categories. and click Edit. 18 For existing line categories. name the style. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. and dimensions. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. and create new subcategories as needed. 20 Click OK. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. You can add and delete view scales. and specify the properties. 32 To modify a line pattern. modify the line weight. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed.

When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. 61 Under Doors and Windows. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. and specify the properties. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. Volume. click Duplicate. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. 46 Click OK. In the Tags dialog. and Angle settings. and choose a decimal symbol.40 Click OK. when you add a door with the tag option selected. Linear. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. name the style. 58 Click OK. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . 42 Select the Type drop-down list. select it from this list. 53 For Length. For example. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. 60 Under Walls. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. and radial dimensions are modified separately. 55 Click OK. 62 Click OK. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. click Format. click Load. 50 To load new annotation tags. and click OK. angular. To see the details of a particular style. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 57 Specify the Slope option. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. TIP In the drawing area. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag.

These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. 65 Click OK. Medium. create new browser organization types. Each command is available on the Settings menu. Using the arrows between the columns. For example. and make modifications in each area as necessary. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. click the Views tab. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. The detail level is based on view scale. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. and move view scales as needed. Use the table below as a checklist. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. You can find additional information in Help. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . In such a case.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. Links to associated tutorials are provided. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. When you create a new view. See Setting up If necessary. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. 70 Click the Sheets tab. 71 Delete. rename. or edit existing organization types. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. 69 If necessary. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. or Fine. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. or edit existing organization types. However. 68 Delete. click the arrows between columns. create new browser organization types. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. Although these settings can be saved within a template. To move the view scales. 72 If necessary. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. 64 Review the table. In a typical project. rename. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. 73 Click OK.

You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. For example. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. If this selection is satisfactory. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. modify. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. Although the options are endless. or use the Project Browser. Although this is possible. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If necessary. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you can set the default contour line interval. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. phase filters. or electrical fixtures. or add to this selection. notice the list of doors already loaded. You can load any family or group into a template. furniture. title blocks. In the steps that follow. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. In addition. However. 2 In the Type Selector. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. you could load detail components. if you load every available window type. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . and electrical fixtures. For example. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. click Door.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. you do both. there are some important thoughts to consider. you can move onto the next component type. you can set up the phases. the section cut material. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. you may want to delete. Depending on the intended use of this template. do so before starting this exercise. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. and the poche depth. If you have not completed the previous exercise.

3 To modify. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. Notice that each family category is listed. and click Open. Enter a name. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. Select it. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. Click Duplicate. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click OK. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. click Edit/New. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. Modify type properties. In the Element Properties dialog. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. or modify a door. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. Make modifications. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. click Edit/New. expand Families. and click OK. create. click Load. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. and click OK. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. create. or load a new door type. In the Element Properties dialog. click Bar. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types.

and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. To load a title block. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. (Element Properties). you created new projects using different templates. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. click 12 Click Preview. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. load. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. right-click the component. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. In addition. create. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. you create the views required for your template. This title block is currently part of the template. In addition. To do so. 13 Click OK.9 Expand Annotation Symbols.) 10 Expand the title block. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. Discipline. click Load. View Range. Detail Level. and select the title block type. In this exercise. and click Delete. 11 On the Options Bar. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with.

under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. you can apply a view template to any view. 12 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. double-click Level 2. double-click South. click Apply. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. select Site Plan. 15 In the Project Browser. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. In addition. At any time. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and apply the appropriate template. double-click Site. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. you will first modify view templates. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. under Elevations. and double-click Level 1. select Architectural Plan. Every time a new plan view is created. 6 Click OK. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. After applying the template. 11 Click Apply. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. and click OK. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. 2 Under Names. open the view from the Project Browser. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views.settings of categories and subcategories. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. and then click OK. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. 4 If necessary. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. the view is not linked to the template in any way. and click OK. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 18 If you modified any other view templates. click Apply.

select Make Plan View.Notice the level names. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. under Floor Plans. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . click Schedule/Quantities. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. under 3D Views. use the ViewCube. Black level heads have no associated views. If prompted. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. duplicate. 30 In the Project Browser. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 21 In the Project Browser. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. right-click the view name. and click Rename. review the floor plans. click 29 In the Project Browser. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. right-click the ViewCube. right-click the ViewCube. and click Save View. To orient the 3D view to another view. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. and elevations. in the shortcut menu. right-click {3D}. (Default 3D View). and click Properties. To orient the 3D view to a direction. review the existing floor plans. 31 Rename the 3D View. a face. ceiling plans. If it does not display. right-click the ViewCube. or an edge of the ViewCube. click Orient to View. If you want to modify view properties. 23 To add more levels to the template. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. click Level. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. click Orient to a Direction. By default. on the View toolbar. or delete them as needed. 20 In the Project Browser. enter a view name. expand 3D Views. 27 Create additional levels as needed. 24 On the Options Bar. and select the desired view. 22 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1. notice that you have the option to rename. or delete this view. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. in the Project Browser. and select the desired direction. Blue level heads have associated plan views. under Floor Plans. duplicate. Rename. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. and.

txt for AutoCAD. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. expand Sheets (all). select and order required fields. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. Right-click the sheet name. and click OK. You can still add views to the sheet. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF.You can add schedules to a template. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. in the Project Browser. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. 37 Click OK. select the title block and delete it. and click Add View to Sheet. When you import a DWG or DXF file. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. modify settings as needed. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. On the Formatting tab. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. select the category type. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. 42 Create new sheets as needed. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. On the Appearance tab. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. modify settings as needed. and click Rename. To later add a title block to a sheet. click Add View. and click OK. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click OK. Select a view. modify settings as needed. and modify their properties accordingly. assign filters. To do so. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. select one. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .txt for MicroStation). If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. After the sheet is created. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. On the Filter tab. 40 To add views to the sheet. click Sheet. You are prompted to select a title block. or exportlayersdgn. select the default title block. on the View tab of the Design Bar.

When scheduling. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. When you create a multi-category schedule. windows. and click Save. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. and related multi-category tags and schedules. You can save these mappings to a text file. 2 For each category. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . project parameters. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. name the file. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. These settings are retained within the project template. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. select Save As. and click Save. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). for example. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. name the file. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. and click Save. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. They cannot be shared with other projects. and so on. When you import a DWG or DXF file. Using shared parameters. name the file. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. click Save As. therefore. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. doors. For example. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. 9 Click Save As. 5 For each category. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. 8 In the dialog. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. and they become the set mappings for the project. and so on. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category.

8 Under Parameters. 3 Name and save the file. under Groups. and specify its discipline and type. 22 Click OK. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you may want to save the file to a network location. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 25 Click Select.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. add required parameters. For each parameter group. enter a parameter name. select a group to add parameters to. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. 2 Click Create. 11 For each parameter group. 26 Click OK. click New. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. 5 Enter the group name. 16 Under Parameter Data. and choose a shared parameter. If a file already exists. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. 6 Create as many groups as needed. If this template will be used by multiple team members. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. 9 Name the parameter. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. project parameters. because each office has a unique set of needs. select a parameter discipline type. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. and select Shared Parameter. click Add. for Name. 24 To add a shared project parameter. 14 Click Add. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. 18 Under Type of Parameter. 23 Add project parameters as needed. 21 Under Categories. and click OK. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. you can create a list of parameters. select a parameter value type. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. select Project parameter. 19 Under Group parameter under. 17 Under Discipline. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. click New. 10 Click OK.

and print. make minor modifications if necessary. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. or refer to the online help. select the tag. 37 When you have completed the schedule. paper placement. you need only select a setting. select Multi-Category. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. For information on creating multi-category tags. click Setup. you create named print settings. 2 Under Printer. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. for Name. you can set options such as sheet sizes. 28 Click OK. 35 For Name. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. Click OK. 32 Navigate to the directory. you can load them into the template. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. and click OK. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Schedule/Quantities. In this exercise. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. 6 In the New dialog. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. and the percent of actual size. By creating named settings within the template. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. The tag is now part of the template. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. save the file as a template. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. 4 Modify the printer settings. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. and click Open. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . For each printer. 3 Under Settings. 34 For Category. and make it your default template file.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. enter a name for the schedule. By going first to the Print command. click OK. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. 5 Click Save As.

By investing the time to individualize your template.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. In this lesson. 24 Navigate to the template location. and click Save. You can also set this template as your default template. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. save it in a network location. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. click Setup. 20 Click OK. 25 Click OK. modify the printer settings. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. and saved them to a template. Create additional settings as needed. Your template is complete. 15 Name the template. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. In addition. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. select it. 9 In the Print dialog. and click OK. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. and create new settings for this printer. In addition. you ensure that office standards are maintained. and click Open. 22 Click the File Locations tab. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. The only remaining task is to save it. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. 14 Under Save as type. loaded components. This can provide a good starting point for a template.rte). 10 Repeat these steps as needed. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 11 Click Close when finished. select a different printer. 19 Select the template. enter a new name for the printer. If you have a project. select Template Files (*. 18 Click Browse. click Save as. If you need to share this file with others. you modified settings. click Browse. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. and click Open. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. 23 For Default template file.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful